Juniper Networks M160 Users Manual Print Preview C

M160 to the manual 2d4719d0-72f0-4a59-8cbc-3d264395acc0

2015-02-09

: Juniper-Networks Juniper-Networks-M160-Users-Manual-567115 juniper-networks-m160-users-manual-567115 juniper-networks pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 312 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

M160 Internet Router

Hardware Guide

Juniper Networks®, Inc.

1194 North Mathilda Avenue

Sunnyvale, California 94089

USA

408-745-2000

www.juniper.net

Part Number: 530-007250-01, Revision 5

This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine, developed by Epilogue Technology, an Integrated Systems Company. Copyright

at private expense, and no part of them is in the public domain.

This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. All of the documentation and

3.0 by Cornell University and its collaborators. Gated is based on Kirton’s EGP, UC Berkeley’s routing daemon (routed), and DCN’s HELLO routing

Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, NetScreen, NetScreen Technologies, the NetScreen logo, NetScreen-Global Pro, ScreenOS, and

GigaScreen are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

The following are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc.: ERX, ESP, E-series, Instant Virtual Extranet, Internet Processor, J2300, J4300, J6300, J-Protect,

J-series,J-Web,JUNOS,JUNOScope,JUNOScript,JUNOSe,M5,M7i,M10,M10i,M20,M40,M40e,M160,M320,M-series,MMD,NetScreen-5GT,

NetScreen-5XP, NetScreen-5XT, NetScreen-25, NetScreen-50, NetScreen-204, NetScreen-208, NetScreen-500, NetScreen-5200, NetScreen-5400,

NetScreen-IDP 10, NetScreen-IDP 100, NetScreen-IDP 500, NetScreen-Remote Security Client, NetScreen-Remote VPN Client, NetScreen-SA 1000 Series,

NetScreen-SA 3000 Series, NetScreen-SA 5000 Series, NetScreen-SA Central Manager, NetScreen Secure Access, NetScreen-SM 3000, NetScreen-Security

Manager, NMC-RX, SDX, Stateful Signature, T320, T640, T-series, and TX Matrix. All other trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or

registered service marks are the property of their respective owners. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to

change, modify, transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Writing: Sheila Nolte, Tony Mauro, Jerry Isaac

Editing: Stella Hackell

Illustration: Faith Bradford

Cover Design: Edmonds Design

Revision History

25 February 2005—530-007250-01 Revision 5. Correct DC power illustration and replacement procedure.

12 November 2004—530-007250-01 Revision 4. Revised fuse replacement procedure.

30 June 2003—530-007250-01 Revision 3. Corrected and added component information.

15 October 2002—530-007250-01 Revision 2. Incorporated updated technical information; synchronized with M40e Internet Router Hardware Guide.

15 March 2002—530-007250-01 Revision 1. Incorporated updated technical information.

15 October 2001—Incorporated updated technical information.

15 May 2001—Adopted new template.

28 February 2001—Incorporated updated technical information.

31 August 2000—Incorporated updated technical information.

31 March 2000—First edition.

The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify, transfer or

otherwise revise this publication without notice.

Products made or sold by Juniper Networks (including the ERX-310, ERX-705, ERX-710, ERX-1410, ERX-1440, M5, M7i, M10, M10i, M20, M40, M40e,

M160, M320, and T320 routers, T640 routing node, and the JUNOS and SDX-300 software) or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the

following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,473,599, 5,905,725, 5,909,440, 6,192,051, 6,333,650, 6,359,479,

6,406,312, 6,429,706, 6,459,579, 6,493,347, 6,538,518, 6,538,899, 6,552,918, 6,567,902, 6,578,186, and 6,590,785.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. The JUNOS software has no known time-related limitations through the year

2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.

End User License Agreement

READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE. BY DOWNLOADING,

INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN, YOU (AS CUSTOMER

OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER, AS A REPRESENTATIVE/AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER) CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS

AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN, THEN (A) DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE

SOFTWARE, AND (B) YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING LICENSE TERMS.

1. The Parties. The parties to this Agreement are Juniper Networks, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively "Juniper"), and the person or organization that

originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license(s) for use of the Software ("Customer") (collectively, the "Parties").

2. The Software. In this Agreement, "Software" means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper-supplied software, and updates and

releases of such software, for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.

3. License Grant. Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein, Juniper grants to Customer a

non-exclusive and non-transferable license, without right to sublicense, to use the Software, in executable form only, subject to the following use restrictions:

a. Customer shall use the Software solely as embedded in, and for execution on, Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from

Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller, unless the applicable Juniper documentation expressly permits installation on non-Juniper equipment.

b. Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit, or as many chassis or processing

units for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees.

c. Other Juniper documentation for the Software (such as product purchase documents, documents accompanying the product, the

Software user manual(s), Juniper’s website for the Software, or messages displayed by the Software) may specify limits to Customer’s use of the

Software. Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats, concurrent users, sessions, subscribers, nodes, or transactions, or

require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features, functionalities, or capabilities, or provide temporal or geographical limits.

Customer’s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable licenses.

The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer. No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase

the applicable license(s) for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.

4. Use Prohibitions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to, and Customer agrees not to and shall

not: (a) modify, unbundle, reverse engineer, or create derivative works based on the Software; (b) make unauthorized copies of the Software (except as

necessary for backup purposes); (c) rent, transfer, or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software, in any form, to any third party; (d) remove any

proprietary notices, labels, or marks on or in any copy of the Software; (e) distribute any copy of the Software to any third party, including as may be

embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand market; (f) use any ’locked’ or key-restricted feature, function, or capability without first purchasing

the applicable license(s) and obtaining a valid key from Juniper, even if such feature, function, or capability is enabled without a key; (g) distribute any key

for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party; (h) use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer

from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (i) use the Software on non-Juniper equipment where the Juniper documentation does not expressly permit

installation on non-Juniper equipment; (j) use the Software (or make it available for use) on Juniper equipment that the Customer did not originally purchase

from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; or (k) use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein.

5. Audit. Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement. Upon request by Juniper, Customer shall

furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement.

6. Confidentiality. The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper. As such,

Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence, which at a minimum

includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software.

7. Ownership. Juniper and Juniper’s licensors, respectively, retain ownership of all right, title, and interest (including copyright) in and to the Software,

associated documentation, and all copies of the Software. Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right, title, or interest in

the Software or associated documentation, or a sale of the Software, associated documentation, or copies of the Software.

8. Warranty, Limitation of Liability, Disclaimer of Warranty. If the Software is distributed on physical media (such as CD), Juniper warrants for 90 days

from delivery that the media on which the Software is delivered will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use. This limited

warranty extends only to the Customer. Except as may be expressly provided in separate documentation from Juniper, no other warranties apply to

the Software, and the Software is otherwise provided AS IS. Customer assumes all risks arising from use of the Software. Customer’s sole remedy and

Juniper’s entire liability under this limited warranty is that Juniper, at its option, will repair or replace the media containing the Software, or provide a

refund, provided that Customer makes a proper warranty claim to Juniper, in writing, within the warranty period. Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise

to any obligation to support the Software. Any such support shall be governed by a separate, written agreement. To the maximum extent permitted by law,

Juniper shall not be liable for any liability for lost profits, loss of data or costs or procurement of substitute goods or services, or for any special, indirect, or

consequential damages arising out of this Agreement, the Software, or any Juniper or Juniper-supplied software. In no event shall Juniper be liable for

damages arising from unauthorized or improper use of any Juniper or Juniper-supplied software.

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN OR IN SEPARATE DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED FROM JUNIPER AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

LAW, JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE (WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR OTHERWISE),

INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT DOES

iii

JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE, WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR

INTERRUPTION, OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK.

9. Termination. Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the

license granted herein. Upon such termination, Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in

Customer’s possession or control.

10. Taxes. All license fees for the Software are exclusive of taxes, withholdings, duties, or levies (collectively "Taxes"). Customer shall be responsible

for paying Taxes arising from the purchase of the license, or importation or use of the Software.

11. Export. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign

agency or authority, and not to export or re-export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions, laws or regulations, or

without all necessary approvals. Customer shall be liable for any such violations. The version of the Software supplied to you may contain encryption or

other capabilities restricting your ability to export the Software without an export license.

12. Commercial Computer Software. The Software is "commercial computer software" and is provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication, or

disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7201 through 227.7202-4,

FAR 12.212, FAR 27.405(b)(2), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14(ALT III) as applicable.

13. Miscellaneous. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles. For any

disputes arising under this Agreement, the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of, and venue in, the state and federal courts

within Santa Clara County, California. This Agreement constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the

Software, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software, whether oral or written (including any inconsistent terms

contained in a purchase order), except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer

shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained herein. No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any

rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing by the party to be charged. If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid,the

Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the remainder of this Agreement.

If you have any questions about this agreement, contact Juniper Networks at the following address:

Juniper Networks, Inc.

11 9 4 N o r t h M a t h i l d a Av e n u e

Sunnyvale, CA 94089

USA

Attn: Contracts Administrator

Table of Contents

About This Guide xix

Objectives ...........................................................................xix

Audience.............................................................................xix

Documentation Conventions ......................................................xix

List of Technical Publications......................................................xxi

Documentation Feedback........................................................xxiii

Requesting Support...............................................................xxiii

Part 1 Product Overview

Chapter 1 System Overview .. 3

System Description...................................................................3

Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) ......................................................4

System Redundancy..................................................................4

Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines...................................5

Chapter 2 Hardware Component Overview.. 7

Chassis.................................................................................7

Packet Forwarding Engine ..........................................................11

Midplane........................................................................12

Physical Interface Cards (PICs)................................................13

PIC Components ..........................................................14

Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)............................................14

FPC Components..........................................................16

FPC Types..................................................................17

Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators (PCGs) ........................18

PCG Components .........................................................19

Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM) .................................... 19

SFM Components .........................................................20

Host Module.........................................................................22

Routing Engine.................................................................23

Routing Engine Components.............................................24

Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS).....................................25

MCS Components.........................................................26

Craft Interface.......................................................................27

Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button............................28

LCD and Navigation Buttons .................................................. 29

LCD Idle Mode.............................................................29

LCD Alarm Mode..........................................................30

Table of Contents v

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Host Module LEDs ............................................................. 31

FPC LEDs and Offline Button ................................................. 31

Connector Interface Panel (CIP) ................................................... 32

Routing Engine Management Ports...........................................33

BITS Input Ports................................................................34

Alarm Relay Contacts..........................................................34

Power System.......................................................................35

Power Supply...................................................................36

Circuit Breaker Box ............................................................38

Fuses............................................................................39

Cooling System .....................................................................39

Cooling System Components .................................................40

Airflow through the Chassis...................................................40

Cable Management System........................................................ 41

Chapter 3 JUNOS Internet Software Overview .. 43

Routing Engine Software Components............................................ 43

Routing Protocol Process......................................................44

IPv4 Routing Protocols....................................................44

IPv6 Routing Protocols....................................................46

Routing and Forwarding Tables ..........................................47

Routing Policy .............................................................47

VPNs ............................................................................48

Interface Process...............................................................49

Chassis Process ................................................................49

SNMP and MIB II Processes...................................................49

Management Process..........................................................49

Routing Engine Kernel.........................................................49

Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software ...............................50

Tools for Monitoring the Software.................................................50

Software Upgrades..................................................................50

Chapter 4 System Architecture Overview .. 51

Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture........................................... 51

Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine ..........................52

Routing Engine Architecture.......................................................53

Routing Engine Functions..................................................... 54

Part 2 Initial Installation

Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation .. 59

Rack Requirements.................................................................59

Rack Size and Strength........................................................60

Spacing of Mounting Holes.................................................... 61

Connection to Building Structure............................................. 62

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance.............. 62

Routing Node Environmental Specifications ..................................... 62

Fire Safety Requirements ..........................................................63

vi Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Fire Suppression ...............................................................63

Fire Suppression Equipment..................................................64

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications............................64

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines..............................................65

Distance Limitations for Signaling .......................................65

Radio Frequency Interference............................................65

Electromagnetic Compatibility........................................... 65

Router Power Requirements .................................................. 65

Chassis Grounding ............................................................. 67

Power, Connection, and Cable Specifications................................67

Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines .................................... 70

Fiber Optic and Network Cable Specifications .............................. 71

Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable ............. 71

Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable ........................... 71

Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable.............................72

Calculating Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable.............................73

Attenuating to Prevent Saturation at SONET/SDH PICs.....................74

Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications........................74

Site Preparation Checklist..........................................................75

Chapter 6 Unpacking the Router .. 77

Tools and Parts Required...........................................................77

Unpacking the Router..............................................................77

Chapter 7 Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift.. 81

Tools and Parts Required .......................................................... 81

Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift.................................... 81

Chapter 8 Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift .. 83

Tools and Parts Required ..........................................................84

Removing Components from the Chassis ........................................84

Removing the Power Supplies ................................................86

Removing the Rear Component Cover.......................................86

Removing the SFMs............................................................87

Removing the MCSs ...........................................................88

Removing the PCGs............................................................ 89

Removing the Routing Engines...............................................90

Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly............................... 91

Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly...............................92

Removing the Fan Tray........................................................93

Removing the FPCs............................................................ 94

Removing the Front Impeller Assembly .....................................96

Installing the Chassis into the Rack ...............................................97

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis........................................99

Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly...................................100

Reinstalling the FPCs .........................................................101

Reinstalling the Fan Tray .....................................................102

Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly............................103

Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly............................104

Reinstalling the Routing Engines ............................................105

Reinstalling the PCGs.........................................................106

Reinstalling the MCSs.........................................................107

Table of Contents vii

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Reinstalling the SFMs.........................................................108

Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover ....................................109

Reinstalling the Power Supplies..............................................109

Chapter

9Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration .. 111

Tools and Parts Required.......................................................... 111

Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices ................... 112

Connecting to a Network for Out-of-Band Management...................114

Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device ...............114

Connecting to an External Alarm-Reporting Device .......................115

Connecting PIC Cables ............................................................115

Providing Power to the Router....................................................117

Connecting Power to the Router............................................. 117

Powering On the Router......................................................119

Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software .......................................121

Part 3 Hardware Maintenance, Replacement, and Troubleshooting

Procedures

Chapter 10 Maintaining Hardware Components .. 127

Routine Maintenance Procedures ................................................127

Maintaining Cooling System Components.......................................127

Maintaining the Air Filter.....................................................128

Removing the Air Filter..................................................128

Cleaning the Air Filter ...................................................129

Installing the Air Filter...................................................129

Maintaining the Fan Tray and Impellers ....................................130

Maintaining Host Module Components..........................................131

Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components...........................132

Maintaining FPCs .............................................................133

Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables............................................134

Maintaining the PCGs.........................................................135

Maintaining SFMs.............................................................136

Maintaining Power Supplies ......................................................137

Chapter 11 Replacing Hardware Components.. 139

Tools and Parts Required..........................................................139

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables ..................141

Removing the CIP.............................................................141

Installing the CIP..............................................................143

Replacing Connections to Routing Engine Interface Ports.................145

Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable............................146

Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable ..............................146

Replace Alarm Relay Wires..............................................147

Replacing Cooling System Components .........................................148

Replacing the Fan Tray .......................................................148

viii Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Removing the Fan Tray ..................................................148

Installing the Fan Tray ...................................................149

Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly.....................................150

Removing the Front Impeller Assembly................................151

Removing the Craft Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly ....152

Installing the Craft Interface on the Front Impeller Assembly........153

Installing the Front Impeller Assembly.................................154

Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly..............................154

Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly.........................155

Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly ..........................155

Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly..............................156

Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly.........................157

Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly..........................158

Replacing Host Module Components ............................................159

Replacing an MCS.............................................................159

Removing an MCS........................................................159

Installing an MCS.........................................................161

Removing and Insert the PC Card...........................................163

Removing the PC Card...................................................163

Insert the PC Card........................................................164

Replacing a Routing Engine..................................................165

Removing a Routing Engine.............................................165

Installing a Routing Engine..............................................168

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components .............................169

Replacing an FPC .............................................................169

Removing an FPC ........................................................170

Installing an FPC .........................................................172

Replacing a PCG...............................................................176

Removing a PCG .........................................................176

Installing a PCG...........................................................178

Replacing a PIC ...............................................................179

Removing a PIC ..........................................................179

Installing a PIC ...........................................................181

Replace PIC Cables ...........................................................185

Removing a PIC Cable ...................................................185

Installing a PIC Cable ....................................................186

Replacing an SFM.............................................................188

Removing an SFM........................................................188

Installing an SFM.........................................................189

Replace an SFP................................................................190

Removing an SFP ........................................................190

Installing an SFP..........................................................191

Replacing Power System Components...........................................193

Replacing the Circuit Breaker Box...........................................193

Removing the Circuit Breaker Box......................................193

Installing the Circuit Breaker Box.......................................195

Replacing a Power Supply....................................................197

Removing a Power Supply...............................................197

Installing a Power Supply................................................199

Disconnecting and Connecting Power ......................................200

Disconnecting Power from the Router..................................200

Connecting Power to the Router ........................................202

Replacing a Fuse..............................................................204

Table of Contents ix

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Hardware Components.. 207

Overview of Troubleshooting Resources.........................................207

Command-Line Interface.....................................................207

LEDs ...........................................................................208

LEDs on the Craft Interface..............................................208

LEDs on Hardware Components........................................209

Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages......................................209

Blown Fuse Indicators ........................................................ 211

Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center .............................212

Troubleshooting the Cooling System.............................................212

Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components......................213

Troubleshooting FPCs.........................................................214

Troubleshooting PICs .........................................................215

Troubleshooting the Power System...............................................215

All LEDs on Both Supplies Are Off...........................................215

All LEDs on One Supply Are Off or LED States Are not Correct...........216

Part 4 Appendixes

Appendix A Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information.. 221

Definition of Safety Warning Levels..............................................221

Safety Guidelines and Warnings..................................................222

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings....................................224

Qualified Personnel Warning............................................225

Restricted Access Area Warning ........................................225

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage ...........................226

Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings..................................227

General Electrical Safety Guidelines ....................................229

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines..................................229

Copper Conductors Warning ...........................................230

DC Power Disconnection Warning......................................231

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning.....................232

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning...................................233

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning...............................234

Grounded Equipment Warning..........................................235

In Case of Electrical Accident ...........................................236

Midplane Energy Hazard Warning......................................236

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning......................236

Power Disconnection Warning..........................................237

TN Power Warning .......................................................238

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings................................239

Chassis Lifting Guidelines ...............................................239

Installation Instructions Warning .......................................239

Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings ..........................240

Ramp Warning ...........................................................244

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings............................244

General Laser Safety Guidelines.........................................245

Class 1 Laser Product Warning..........................................245

Class 1 LED Product Warning...........................................245

xTable of Contents

Table of Contents

Laser Beam Warning.....................................................246

Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning ........................247

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings ..........247

Battery Handling Warning...............................................248

Jewelry Removal Warning ...............................................249

Lightning Activity Warning ..............................................250

Operating Temperature Warning........................................251

Product Disposal Warning...............................................252

Agency Approvals..................................................................253

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements ................................254

Canada.........................................................................254

European Community........................................................254

Japan...........................................................................254

United States ..................................................................254

Appendix B Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware .. 255

Locating Component Serial Numbers............................................255

CIP Serial Number ID Label..................................................257

Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label......................................257

DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label ..................................258

FPC Serial Number ID Label .................................................259

MCS Serial Number ID Label.................................................259

PCG Serial Number ID Label .................................................260

PIC Serial Number ID Label..................................................260

Routing Engine Serial Number ID Label.....................................261

SFM Serial Number ID Label.................................................262

Contacting Customer Support ....................................................262

Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC.............................263

Return Procedure..................................................................263

Tools and Parts Required .........................................................264

Packing the Routing Node for Shipment.........................................265

Packing Components for Shipment ..............................................267

Appendix C Cable Connector Pinouts .. 269

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port.............269

DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE

Ports ................................................................................270

RJ-48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs .........................................270

X.21 and V.35 Cable Pinouts for EIA-530 PIC ...................................273

Fast Ethernet 48-port Cable Pinouts .............................................274

Part 5 Index

Index................................................................................279

Table of Contents xi

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

xii Table of Contents

List of Figures

Figure 1: Front of Chassis........................................................................ 8

Figure 2: Rear of Chassis with Component Cover in Place..................................... 9

Figure 3: Rear of Chassis with Component Cover Removed .................................. 10

Figure 4: Midplane...............................................................................13

Figure 5: Front of Chassis with Four-PIC FPC Installed in Slot FPC0..........................15

Figure 6: FPC1 and FPC2........................................................................18

Figure 7: Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generator..........................................19

Figure 8: Switching and Forwarding Module................................................... 21

Figure 9: Routing Engine........................................................................25

Figure 10: Miscellaneous Control Subsystem...................................................27

Figure 11: Craft Interface........................................................................28

Figure 12: LCD in Idle Mode ....................................................................30

Figure 13: LCD in Alarm Mode..................................................................30

Figure 14: Connector Interface Panel...........................................................33

Figure 15: Routing Engine Interface Ports for Host Module 0 ................................34

Figure 16: Alarm Relay Contacts and BITS Input Ports ........................................35

Figure 17: Original Power Supply...............................................................37

Figure 18: Enhanced Power Supply.............................................................37

Figure 19: Circuit Breaker Box..................................................................39

Figure 20: Airflow through the Chassis......................................................... 41

Figure 21: Cable Management System ......................................................... 41

Figure 22: System Architecture ................................................................. 51

Figure 23: Packet Forwarding Engine Components and Data Flow...........................53

Figure 24: Routing Engine Architecture ........................................................54

Figure 25: Control Packet Handling for Routing and Forwarding Table Updates .............55

Figure 26: Typical Center-Mount Rack.......................................................... 61

Figure 27: Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements.................................62

Figure 28: Power and Grounding Cable Lug....................................................67

Figure 29: Typical Source Cabling to the Router ...............................................68

Figure 30: Power and Grounding Cable Connections.......................................... 70

Figure 31: Unpacking the Router ...............................................................79

Figure 32: Removing a Power Supply ..........................................................86

Figure 33: Removing an SFM ...................................................................88

Figure 34: Removing an MCS...................................................................89

Figure 35: Removing a PCG.....................................................................90

Figure 36: Removing a Routing Engine......................................................... 91

Figure 37: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly .....................................92

Figure 38: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly .....................................92

Figure 39: Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly .....................................93

Figure 40: Removing the Fan Tray..............................................................94

Figure 41: Removing an FPC....................................................................96

Figure 42: Removing the Front Impeller Assembly............................................97

Figure 43: Attaching the Lifting Handle ........................................................98

Figure 44: Installing the Chassis in a Rack .....................................................99

Figure 45: Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly .........................................101

Figure 46: Reinstalling an FPC.................................................................102

Figure 47: Reinstalling the Fan Tray ...........................................................103

Figure 48: Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly...................................104

Figure 49: Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly...................................105

List of Figures xiii

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 50: Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly...................................105

Figure 51: Reinstalling a Routing Engine......................................................106

Figure 52: Reinstalling a PCG ..................................................................107

Figure 53: Reinstalling an MCS ................................................................108

Figure 54: Reinstalling an SFM.................................................................109

Figure 55: Reinstalling a Power Supply........................................................ 110

Figure 56: Routing Engine Management Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts ..................113

Figure 57: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector........................................114

Figure 58: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector......................................115

Figure 59: Attaching Cable to a PIC............................................................117

Figure 60: Connecting Power and Grounding Cables.........................................119

Figure 61: Removing the Air Filter.............................................................129

Figure 62: Removing the Filter from the Air Filter Cover.....................................129

Figure 63: Installing the Air Filter..............................................................130

Figure 64: Removing the CIP ..................................................................143

Figure 65: Installing the CIP....................................................................144

Figure 66: Routing Engine Interface Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts .......................145

Figure 67: Ethernet Cable Connector..........................................................146

Figure 68: Serial Port Connector...............................................................147

Figure 69: Removing the Fan Tray.............................................................149

Figure 70: Installing the Fan Tray..............................................................150

Figure 71: Removing the Front Impeller Assembly...........................................152

Figure 72: Removing the Screws along the Top Front Edge of the Front Impeller

Assembly...................................................................................153

Figure 73: Removing the Craft Interface ......................................................153

Figure 74: Installing the Front Impeller Assembly............................................154

Figure 75: Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly ....................................155

Figure 76: Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly .....................................156

Figure 77: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly ....................................157

Figure 78: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly ....................................158

Figure 79: Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly .....................................158

Figure 80: Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly .....................................159

Figure 81: Removing an MCS ..................................................................161

Figure 82: Installing an MCS ...................................................................162

Figure 83: Removing the PC Card .............................................................164

Figure 84: Insert the PC Card ..................................................................165

Figure85:RemovingaRo

uting Engine........................................................167

Figure 86: Installing a Routing Engine.........................................................169

Figure 87: Removing an FPC...................................................................172

Figure 88: Installing an FPC....................................................................175

Figure 89: Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC ............................................176

Figure90:RemovingaPCG

....................................................................177

Figure 91: Installing a PCG.....................................................................179

Figure92:RemovingaPIC

.....................................................................181

Figure 93: Installing a PIC......................................................................184

Figure 94: Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC ............................................184

Figure 95: Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC ............................................187

Figure 96: Removing an SFM ..................................................................189

Figure 97: Installing an SFM ...................................................................190

Figure 98: Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) ................................................190

Figure 99: Removing the Circuit Breaker Box.................................................195

Figure 100: Installing the Circuit Breaker Box.................................................197

Figure 101: Removing a Power Supply ........................................................198

Figure 102: Rear of Power Supply Showing Midplane Connectors...........................199

xiv List of Figures

List of Figures

Figure 103: Installing a Power Supply .........................................................200

Figure 104: Disconnecting Power Cables......................................................202

Figure 105: Connecting Power and Grounding Cables........................................204

Figure 106: Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box...................................................206

Figure 107: Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box................................................... 211

Figure 108: Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag..................................227

Figure 109: Serial Number ID Label ...........................................................256

Figure 110: CIP Serial Number ID Label .......................................................257

Figure 111: Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label ...........................................258

Figure 112: DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label........................................258

Figure 113: FPC Serial Number ID Label ......................................................259

Figure 114: MCS Serial Number ID Label......................................................260

Figure 115: PCG Serial Number ID Label .....................................................260

Figure 116: PIC Serial Number ID Label .......................................................261

Figure 117: Routing Engine 333 Serial Number ID Label.....................................261

Figure 118: Routing Engine 600 Serial Number ID Label.....................................262

Figure 119: SFM Serial Number ID Label .....................................................262

Figure 120: EIA-530 PIC........................................................................273

Figure 121: Fast Ethernet 48-port PIC.........................................................275

Figure 122: VHDCI to RJ-21 Cable .............................................................275

List of Figures xv

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

xvi List of Figures

List of Tables

Table 1: Notice Icons ............................................................................ xx

Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions.......................................................... xx

Table 3: Juniper Networks Technical Documentation .........................................xxi

Table 4: Field-Replaceable Units ................................................................. 4

Table 5: Chassis Physical Specifications........................................................ 11

Table 6: States for PCG LEDs ...................................................................19

Table 7: States for SFM LEDs....................................................................22

Table 8: States for MCS LEDs ...................................................................27

Table 9: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button ....................................29

Table 10: States for Host Module LEDs ......................................................... 31

Table 11: States for FPC LEDs ...................................................................32

Table 12: States for Power Supply LEDs .......................................................37

Table 13: Electrical Specifications for Power Supply...........................................38

Table 14: Spacing of Holes on Front Support Post and Center-Mounting Bracket............ 61

Table 15: Routing Node Environmental Specifications ........................................63

Table 16: Component Power Requirements ...................................................66

Table 17: DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications......................................69

Table 18: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss ....................................73

Table 19: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine Management and Alarm

Interfaces ...................................................................................75

Table 20: Site Preparation Checklist ............................................................75

Table 21: Generic Inventory of Router Components Installed in Chassis .....................79

Table 22: Router Component Weights..........................................................83

Table 23: FPC Removal Checklist ............................................................... 94

Table 24: Tools and Parts Required ............................................................140

Table 25: Fuse Specifications...................................................................206

Table 26: Chassis Alarm Messages.............................................................209

Table 27: SONET/SDH Interface Alarm Messages.............................................210

Table 28: RJ-45 Connector Pinout..............................................................269

Table 29: DB-9 Connector Pinout..............................................................270

Table 30: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Straight) Pinout.............................270

Table 31: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Crossover) Pinout...........................271

Table 32: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Straight) Pinout ............................272

Table 33: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout..........................272

Table 34: DB-25 Connector to V.35 Connector Pinout........................................273

Table 35: DB-25 Connector to DB-15 (X.21) Connector Pinout...............................274

Table 36: RJ-21 Pin Assignments...............................................................275

List of Tables xvii

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

xviii List of Tables

About This Guide

Objectives on page xix

Audience on page xix

Documentation Conventions on page xix

List of Technical Publications on page xxi

Documentation Feedback on page xxiii

Requesting Support on page xxiii

Objectives

This manual describes hardware installation and basic troubleshooting procedures

for the Juniper Networks M160 Internet router. It explains how to prepare your

site for router installation, unpack and install the hardware, power on the router,

perform initial software configuration, and perform routine maintenance. After

completing the installation and basic configuration procedures covered in this

manual, refer to the JUNOS Internet software configuration guides for information

about further JUNOS software configuration.

NOTE: For additional information about Juniper Networks Internet routers and the

Physical Interface Cards (PICs) they support—either corrections to or information

that might have been omitted from this guide—see the hardware release notes at

http://www.juniper.net/.

Audience

This guide is designed for network administrators who are installing and

maintaining a Juniper Networks router or preparing a site for router installation. To

use this guide, you need a broad understanding of networks in general, the Internet

in particular, networking principles, and network configuration. Any detailed

discussion of these concepts is beyond the scope of this guide.

Documentation Conventions

Table 1 defines the notice icons used in this guide.

Documentation Conventions xix

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Table 1: Notice Icons

Icon Meaning Description

Informational note Indicates important features or

instructions.

Caution Indicates a situation that might result in

loss of data or hardware damage.

Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury

or death.

Table 2 defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide.

Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions

Convention Description Examples

Bold sans serif typeface

Represents text that you type. To enter configuration mode, type the

configure command:

user@host> configure

Fixed-width typeface Represents output that appears on the

terminal screen.

user@host> show chassis alarms

No alarms currently active

Italic typeface Introduces important new

terms.

Identifies book names.

Identifies RFC and Internet draft

titles.

Apolicy term is a named

structure that defines match

conditions and actions.

JUNOS System Basics

Configuration Guide

RFC 1997, BGP Communities

Attribute

Italic sans serif typeface

Represents variables (options for which

you substitute a value) in commands or

configuration statements.

Configure the machine’s domain name:

[edit]

root@# set system domain-name

domain-name

Sans serif typeface Represents names of configuration

statements, commands, files, and

directories; IP addresses; configuration

hierarchy levels; or labels on routing

platform components.

To configure a stub area,

include the stub statement at

the [edit protocols ospf area

area-id] hierarchy level.

The console port is labeled

CONSOLE.

< > (angle brackets) Enclose optional keywords or variables. stub <default-metric metric >;

|(pipesymbol) Indicates a choice between the mutually

exclusive keywords or variables on

either side of the symbol. The set of

choices is often enclosed in parentheses

for clarity.

broadcast | multicast

(string1 |string2 |string3 )

xx Documentation Conventions

About This Guide

Convention Description Examples

# (pound sign) Indicates a comment specified on the

same line as the configuration statement

to which it applies.

rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS

only

[](squarebrackets) Encloseavariableforwhichyoucan

substitute one or more values.

community name members [

community-ids ]

Indention and braces ( { } ) Identify a level in the configuration

hierarchy.

; (semicolon) Identifies a leaf statement at a

configuration hierarchy level.

[edit]

routing-options {

static {

route default {

nexthop address ;

retain;

}

J-Web GUI Conventions

Bold typeface Represents J-Web graphical user

interface (GUI) items you click or select.

In the Logical Interfaces box,

select All Interfaces.

To cancel the configuration,

click Cancel.

>(bold right angle bracket) Separates levels in a hierarchy of J-Web

selections.

In the configuration editor hierarchy,

select Protocols>Ospf.

List of Technical Publications

Table 3 lists the software and hardware guides and release notes for Juniper

Networks routing platforms that use the JUNOS Internet software and describes

the contents of each book.

Table 3: Juniper Networks Technical Documentation

Book Description

JUNOS for J-series, M-series, and T-series Routing Platforms Configuration Guides

Feature Guide Provides a detailed explanation and configuration examples for

several of the most complex features in the JUNOS software.

System Basics Provides an overview of the JUNOS software and describes how to

install and upgrade the software. This manual also describes how

to configure system management functions and how to configure

the chassis, including user accounts, passwords, and redundancy.

Network Interfaces and Class of Service Provides an overview of the network interface and class-of-service

functions of the JUNOS software and describes how to configure

the network interfaces on the router.

MPLS Applications Provides an overview of traffic engineering concepts and describes

how to configure traffic engineering protocols.

List of Technical Publications xxi

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Book Description

Multicast Protocols Provides an overview of multicast concepts and describes how to

configure multicast routing protocols.

Network Management Provides an overview of network management concepts and

describes how to configure various network management features,

such as SNMP, accounting options, and cflowd.

Policy Framework Provides an overview of policy concepts and describes how to

configure routing policy, firewall filters, and forwarding options.

Routing Protocols Provides an overview of routing concepts and describes how to

configure routing, routing instances, and unicast routing protocols.

Services Interfaces Provides an overview of the services interfaces functions of the

JUNOS software and describes how to configure the services

interfaces on the router.

VPNs Provides an overview and describes how to configure Layer 2 and

Layer 3 virtual private networks (VPNs), virtual private LAN service

(VPLS), and Layer 2 circuits. Provides configuration examples.

JUNOS References

Network and Services Interfaces Command

Reference

Describes the JUNOS Internet software operational mode

commands you use to monitor and troubleshoot network and

services interfaces on Juniper Networks routing platforms.

Protocols, Class of Service, and System Basics

Command Reference

Describes the JUNOS Internet software operational mode

commands you use to monitor and troubleshoot most aspects of

Juniper Networks routing platforms.

System Log Messages Reference Describes how to access and interpret system log messages

generated by JUNOS software modules and provides a reference

page for each message.

JUNOScript API Documentation

JUNOScript API Guide Describes how to use the JUNOScript application programming

interface (API) to monitor and configure Juniper Networks routers.

JUNOScript API Configuration Reference Provides reference pages for the configuration tags in the

JUNOScript API.

JUNOScript API Operational Reference Provides reference pages for the operational tags in the JUNOScript

API.

JUNOS Comprehensive Index and Glossary

Comprehensive Index and Glossary Provides a complete index of all JUNOS Internet software books

and the JUNOScript API Guide. Also provides a comprehensive

glossary.

Hardware Documentation

Hardware Guide Describes how to install, maintain, and troubleshoot routers and

router components. Each platform has its own hardware guide.

PIC Guide Describes the router Physical Interface Cards (PICs). Each router

platform has its own PIC guide.

JUNOScope Documentation

JUNOScope Software User Guide Describes the JUNOScope software graphical user interface (GUI),

how to install and administer the software, and how to use the

software to manage router configuration files and monitor router

operations.

xxii List of Technical Publications

About This Guide

Book Description

J-series Services Router Documentation

J-series Services Router User Guide Contains instructions for installing, configuring, and managing a

J-series Services Router. The guide explains how to prepare your

site for installation, unpack and install the hardware, power on the

router, configure secure routing, monitor network operations, and

perform routine maintenance.

Release Notes

JUNOS Internet Software Release Notes Provide a summary of new features for a particular software

release. Software release notes also contain corrections and

updates to published JUNOS and JUNOScript manuals, provide

information that might have been omitted from the manuals, and

describe upgrade and downgrade procedures.

Hardware Release Notes Describe the available documentation for the router platform

and summarize known problems with the hardware and

accompanying software. Each platform has its own release notes.

JUNOScope Software Release Notes Contain corrections and updates to the published JUNOScope

manual, provide information that might have been omitted from

the manual, and describe upgrade and downgrade procedures.

J-series Services Router Release Notes Briefly describe Services Router features, identify known hardware

problems, and provide upgrade and downgrade instructions

Documentation Feedback

We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so

that we can improve the documentation. You can send your comments to

techpubs-comments@juniper.net, or fill out the documentation feedback form at

http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/docbug/docbugreport.html. If you are using e-mail, be

sure to include the following information with your comments:

Document name

Document part number

Page number

Software release version

Requesting Support

For technical support, open a support case using the Case Manager link at

http://www.juniper.net/support/ or call 1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States) or

1-408-745-9500 (outside the United States).

Requesting Support xxiii

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

xxiv Requesting Support

Part 1

Product Overview

System Overview on page 3

Hardware Component Overview on page 7

JUNOS Internet Software Overview on page 43

System Architecture Overview on page 51

Product Overview 1

2Product Overview

Chapter 1

System Overview

This chapter provides an overview of the Juniper Networks M160 Internet router,

discussing the following topics:

System Description on page 3

Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4

System Redundancy on page 4

Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines on page 5

System Description

The M160 Internet router is a complete routing system that provides

SONET/SDH, ATM, Ethernet, and channelized interfaces for large networks

and network applications, such as those supported by Internet service

providers (ISPs). Application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), a definitive

part of the router design, enable the router to forward data at the high

speeds demanded by current network media.

The router accommodates up to eight Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), which can

each be configured with a variety of network media types, altogether providing up to

32 OC-12/STM-4, 32 OC-48/STM-16, or eight OC-192/STM-64 ports per system. The

router height of 35 in. (89 cm) enables stacked installation of two M160 systems in

a single floor-to-ceiling rack, for increased port density per unit of floor space.

The router’s maximum aggregate throughput is 160 gigabits per second (Gbps)

simplex or 80 Gbps full duplex. The router provides very high throughput for

any combination of Physical Interface Cards (PICs) that does not exceed 3

Gbps on an FPC1 or 10 Gbps on an FPC2. A combination that exceeds these

numbers is supported, but constitutes oversubscription.

The router architecture cleanly separates control operations from packet forwarding

operations, which helps to eliminate processing and traffic bottlenecks. Control

operations in the router are performed by the Routing Engine, which runs

JUNOS Internet software to handle routing protocols, traffic engineering, policy,

policing, monitoring, and configuration management. Forwarding operations

in the router are performed by the Packet Forwarding Engine, which consists

of hardware, including ASICs, designed by Juniper Networks.

System Description 3

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)

Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are router components that can be replaced at

the customer site. Replacing most FRUs requires minimal router downtime.

The router uses the following types of FRUs:

Hot-removableandhot-insertableFRUs—Youcanremoveandreplacethese

components without powering down the router or disrupting the routing

functions.

Hot-pluggable FRUs—You can remove and replace these components without

powering down the router, but the routing functions of the system are

interrupted when the component is removed.

Table 4 lists the FRUs for the M160 router.

Table 4: Field-Replaceable Units

Hot-Removable and

Hot-Insertable FRUs Hot-Pluggable FRUs

FRUs That Require Powering

Down the Router

Air filter

Fan tray (located behind

the cable management

system)

Flexible PIC Concentrator

(FPC)

Physical Interface Card

(PIC)

Power supply

Small form factor

pluggable (SFP)

Miscellaneous Control

Subsystem (MCS)

Packet Forwarding Engine

Clock Generator (PCG)

Routing Engine

Switching and Forwarding

Module (SFM)

Circuit breaker box

Connector Interface Panel (CIP)

For FRU replacement instructions, see “Replacing Hardware

Components” on page 139.

System Redundancy

The router is designed so that no single point of failure can cause the entire system

to fail. The following hardware components contribute to system redundancy:

Cooling system—When the temperature inside the router is below the

acceptable maximum, the cooling system’s components function at less than

full speed. If the temperature becomes excessive—for example, because a

cooling system component is removed—the MCS automatically increases the

speed of the remaining components to reduce the temperature. The cooling

4System Redundancy

System Overview

system can function at the higher speed indefinitely. For more information,

see Cooling System on page 39.

Host module (Routing Engine and MCS functioning together)—The router

can have one or two host modules. If two host modules are installed, one

(the master) is active and the other is in standby mode. If the master host

module (or either of its components) is removed from the chassis, the standby

host module becomes active. The Routing Engine and MCS must reside in

adjacent slots and be fully operational for the host module to function. For

more information, see Host Module on page 22.

PCG—The router has two PCGs. Both PCGs send their clock signals to the

other Packet Forwarding Engine components, along with a signal that indicates

which clock is the master. If one PCG fails, the other PCG becomes the master

system clock. For more information, see “Packet Forwarding Engine Clock

Generators (PCGs)” on page 18.

Power supply—The router has two load-sharing, fully redundant power

supplies to distribute DC power to the other components. If one power

supply fails, the second power supply can provide full power to the router’s

components indefinitely. For more information, see Power System on page 35.

SFM—The router can have up to four interconnected SFMs. If one SFM fails,

the switching and forwarding functions of the failed module are distributed

among the remaining SFMs. Total bandwidth is reduced by 1/n,where nis

the total number of SFMs installed in the router. For example, in a system with

four SFMs, each SFM provides one-fourth of the forwarding capacity. For more

information, see “Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM)” on page 19.

In the base configuration, the router has one host module and multiple SFMs,

PCGs, power supplies, and cooling system components.

Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines

To avoid harm to yourself or the router as you install and maintain it, you need

to follow the guidelines for working with and near electrical equipment, as well

as the safety procedures for working with Internet routers. For a discussion of

how to make the installation site a safe environment, see “Preparing for Router

Installation” on page 59. For a list of safety warnings, see “Safety and Regulatory

Compliance Information” on page 221 and particularly “Electrical Safety Guidelines

and Warnings” on page 227. However, providing an exhaustive set of guidelines

for working with electrical equipment is beyond the scope of this manual.

Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines 5

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

6Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines

Chapter 2

Hardware Component Overview

This chapter provides an overview of the hardware components on the M160

Internet router:

Chassis on page 7

Packet Forwarding Engine on page 11

Host Module on page 22

Craft Interface on page 27

Connector Interface Panel (CIP) on page 32

Power System on page 35

Cooling System on page 39

Cable Management System on page 41

Chassis

The router chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the other

hardware components. The chassis is 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) wide and 29 in.

(73.6 cm) deep. The chassis height of 35 in. (89 cm) enables stacked

installation of two M160 routers in a single floor-to-ceiling rack. For more

information, see Rack Requirements on page 59.

The two front support posts and center-mounting brackets (one on each

side) extend the chassis width to 19 in. (48.3 cm) and enable installation

into either a front-mount or a center-mount rack.

Figure 1, Figure 2, and Figure 3 show three views of the router chassis.

Chassis 7

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 1: Front of Chassis

1165

Craft interface

FPCs

CIP

ESD point

Cable management

system

Air filter

8Chassis

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 2: Rear of Chassis with Component Cover in Place

1167

Circuit

breaker box

Grounding

points

ESD point

Component

cover

Upper

impeller

Lower

impeller

Power

supplies

PCG 0

PCG 1

Chassis 9

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 3: Rear of Chassis with Component Cover Removed

1166

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

MCS 1

SFM 2

SFM 3

PCG 1

PCGs

Routing Engines

MCS 0

MCS 1

SFMs

The chassis includes the following electrical safety components:

Two electrostatic discharge (ESD) points (banana plug receptacles), one front

and one rear, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2

Two internally threaded grounding points, as shown in Figure 2

WARNING: Before removing or installing components of a functioning router, attach

an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare

wrist. Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router.

The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation.

10 Chassis

Hardware Component Overview

For further safety information, see “Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information”

on page 221.

Table 5 summarizes physical specifications for the router chassis.

Table 5: Chassis Physical Specifications

Description Value

Chassis height 35 in. (89 cm)

Chassis width 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) for sides of chassis

19 in. (48.3 cm) with front support posts and center-mounting brackets

Chassis depth 29 in. (73.6 cm)

Weight,

maximum

configuration

370.5 lb (168 kg)

Weight,

minimum

configuration

190 lb (86 kg)

Thermal output 9400 BTU/hour

Packet Forwarding Engine

The Packet Forwarding Engine is a multicomponent system that uses

application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs) to perform Layer 2 and Layer 3

packet switching, route lookups, and packet forwarding. The ASICs include the

Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC, Internet Processor II ASIC, I/O Manager ASIC,

Packet Director ASIC, and media-specific controller ASICs.

ThePacketForwardingEnginehasthefollowingcomponents:

Midplane—Physically separates front and rear cavities inside the chassis,

distributes power from the power supplies, and transfers packets and signals

between router components, which plug into it.

Physical Interface Card (PIC)—Physically connects the router to network media

such as OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, Ethernet, and channelized interfaces.

PICs are housed in Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs). (Quad-wide PICs, such

as the OC-192/STM-64 SONET/SDH PIC, are exceptions. Such PICs occupy

Packet Forwarding Engine 11

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

an entire FPC slot in the chassis and insert directly into the slot rather than

into an FPC card carrier.)

Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC)—Processes incoming and outgoing packets.

Up to eight FPCs plug into the midplane from the front of the chassis. Each

FPC accommodates up to four PICs.

Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generator (PCG)—Sends clock signals to

the other Packet Forwarding Engine components. Two PCGs plug into the

midplane from the rear of the chassis.

Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM)—Performs route lookup, filtering, and

switching. Up to four SFMs plug into the midplane from the rear of the chassis.

For information about Packet Forwarding Engine components, see the following

sections:

Midplane on page 12

Physical Interface Cards (PICs) on page 13

Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) on page 14

Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators (PCGs) on page 18

Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM) on page 19

Midplane

The midplane is a panel located in the center of the chassis, running from side

to side and forming the rear of the FPC card cage (see Figure 4). All router

components other than PICs plug directly into the midplane. The midplane contains

an EEPROM that stores the serial number and revision level of the midplane.

Themidplaneperformsthefollowingfunctions:

Transfer of packets—The midplane accepts an incoming packet after it is

processedbyanFPC,andtransmitsittoanSFM.TheSFMperformsswitching

and forwarding functions and transfers outgoing packets back across the

midplane to the FPCs for transmission to the network.

Power distribution—The midplane distributes power to all router components

from the power supplies attached to it.

Signal connectivity—The midplane transports the signals exchanged by

system components for monitoring and control purposes.

12 Packet Forwarding Engine

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 4: Midplane

1171

Midplane

FPC

card cage

Physical Interface Cards (PICs)

Physical Interface Cards (PICs) physically connect the router to network

media. They are housed in Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs); for more

information about FPCs, see “Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)” on page

14. (Quad-wide PICs, such as the OC-192/STM-64 SONET/SDH PIC, are

exceptions. Such PICs occupy an entire FPC slot in the chassis and insert

directly into the slot rather than into an FPC card carrier.)

PICs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets

to the network, performing framing and line-speed signaling for their media

type as required. PICs also encapsulate outgoing packets received from the

FPCs before transmitting them. The controller ASIC on each PIC performs

additional control functions specific to the PIC media type.

The router supports various PICs, including ATM, Channelized, Gigabit

Ethernet, IP Services, and SONET/SDH interfaces. For complete PIC

specifications, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

Packet Forwarding Engine 13

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Some PICs, such as selected Gigabit Ethernet PICs, accept small form factor

pluggables (SFPs), which are fiber-optic transceivers that can be removed from

the PIC. Various SFPs have different reach characteristics. You can mix them in

a single PIC and change the combination dynamically. SFPs are hot-removable

and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4. For

SFP replacement instructions, see “Replace an SFP” on page 190. For information

about PICs that use SFPs, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

You can install up to four PICs in an FPC. The number of ports on a PIC

depends on the type of PIC. PICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as

described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4. For PIC replacement

instructions, see “Replacing a PIC” on page 179.

PIC Components

Most PICs supported on the M160 router have the following components. For

complete specifications, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide. For information

about pinouts for PIC cable connectors, see “Cable Connector Pinouts” on page 269.

One or more cable connector ports—Accept a network media connector.

LEDs—Indicate PIC and port status. Most PICs have an LED labeled STATUS on

the PIC faceplate. Some PICs have additional LEDs, often one per port. The

meaning of the LED states differs for various PICs. For more information, see

the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

Offline button—Prepares the PIC for removal from the FPC when pressed. For

the PICs that install on an FPC1, the offline button for each PIC is next to it on

the FPC card carrier. For the PICs that install on an FPC2, the offline button is

onthePICfaceplate. SeeFigure6.

Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)

Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) house the PICs that connect the router to network

media (for information about PICs, see “Physical Interface Cards (PICs)” on page

13). The main function of an FPC is to connect the PICs installed in it to the other

router components. An I/O Manager ASIC on the FPC divides each incoming data

packet into 64-byte cells and passes the cells through the midplane to the SFM,

where another ASIC decides how to distribute them among the memory buffers

located on and shared by all installed FPCs. After the SFM decides how to forward a

packet, an I/O Manager ASIC on the FPC reassembles the corresponding data cells

back into network-packet form and passes the packet to the appropriate PIC for

transmission to the network. For more information, see “Data Flow through the

Packet Forwarding Engine” on page 52.

Up to eight FPCs install vertically into the midplane from the front of the

chassis. The FPC slots are numbered from FPC0 to FPC7,lefttoright. EachFPC

accommodates up to four PICs. The PIC slots in each FPC are numbered from

0(zero) through 3, top to bottom. An FPC can be installed into any FPC slot,

regardless of the PICs it contains, and any combination of slots can be used. If a

14 Packet Forwarding Engine

Hardware Component Overview

slot is empty, you must install a blank FPC panel to shield it, so that cooling air can

circulate properly throughout the card cage.

Figure 5, which shows a chassis with an FPC in slot FPC0, omits the blank FPC

panels to show the position of the FPC in the card cage.

Figure 5: Front of Chassis with Four-PIC FPC Installed in Slot FPC0

1189

For information about FPC components and types, see the following sections:

FPC Components on page 16

FPC Types on page 17

Packet Forwarding Engine 15

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

FPC Components

An FPC has the following components:

FPC card carrier—Houses the ASICs, connectors, and processor subsystem.

Four I/O Manager ASICs—Parse Layer 2 and Layer 3 data and perform

encapsulation and segmentation. The I/O Manager ASICs divide incoming

packets into 64-byte data cells for easier processing, and reassemble the cells

for each packet after the forwarding decision is made for it. Enhanced FPCs

have I/O Manager ASICs capable of enhanced quality of service.

Two Packet Director ASICs—Transfer packets between the PICs and the I/O

Manager ASICs: one directs incoming packets from the PICs to the I/O

Manager ASICs, while the second directs outgoing packets from the I/O

Manager ASICs to the PICs.

Eight identical synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules

(DIMMs)—Form the memory pool shared with the other FPCs installed

in the router.

Parity-protectedsynchronousSRAM(SSRAM)—Storesdatastructuresused

by the I/O Manager ASICs.

Processor subsystem—Manages packet handling in the FPC and

communication with the SFM. It is a PowerPC 603e-based CPU with

parity-protected DRAM.

EEPROM—Stores the serial number and revision level of the FPC.

Two LEDs—Indicate FPC status. The LED labeled OK is green and the one

labeled FAIL is red. The LEDs for each FPC are located on the router craft

interface. For more information, see “FPC LEDs and Offline Button” on

page 31.

Offline button—Prepares the FPC for removal from the router when pressed.

Like the LEDs, an offline button is located on the craft interface. For more

information, see “FPC LEDs and Offline Button” on page 31.

Four PIC offline buttons (on FPC1 only)—Prepare each corresponding PIC

for removal from the FPC.

Ejector levers—Control the locking system that secures the FPC in the card

cage.

NOTE: For specific information about FPC components (for example, the amount of

memory available), issue the show chassis fpc command.

16 Packet Forwarding Engine

Hardware Component Overview

FPC Types

The router supports two types of FPC, shown in Figure 6:

FPC1 (standard or enhanced)—Supports PICs including single-port

OC-12/STM-4 and Gigabit Ethernet.

FPC2 (standard or enhanced)—Supports higher-speed PICs including

OC-48/STM-16 and Tunnel services.

You can install any combination of FPC types together on the router.

FPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units

(FRUs) on page 4. When you remove or install an FPC, packet forwarding halts

forabout200mswhilethePacketForwardingEngineadjuststothechangein

the amount of memory available in the pool located on and shared by all FPCs.

When you install an FPC into a functioning router, the Routing Engine downloads

the FPC software, the FPC runs its diagnostics, and the PICs housed on the FPC

are enabled. Forwarding continues uninterrupted during this process. For FPC

replacement instructions, see “Replacing an FPC” on page 169.

Enhanced FPCs have I/O Manager ASICs capable of enhanced quality of

service, and 2 MB of SSRAM. Enhanced FPCs can be identified through

theCLI,orbyastickeronthefaceplate.

The PICs that install on both types of FPC are also hot-removable and hot-insertable.

For more information, see “Physical Interface Cards (PICs)” on page 13.

Packet Forwarding Engine 17

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 6: FPC1 and FPC2

1187

Ejector lever

FPC 2

Ejector lever

Offline buttons

(on PICs)

Ejector lever

FPC 1

Ejector lever

Offline buttons

(on FPC)

Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators (PCGs)

The router has two Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators (PCGs) installed

in the slots at the rear of the chassis that are labeled PCG 0 and PCG 1,asshown

in Figure 3. The PCGs generate a 125-MHz clock signal used to gate packet

processing. During startup, the active Routing Engine determines which PCG is

master and which is backup, and the MCS relays the decision to the PCGs and to

themodulesandASICsinthePacketForwardingEnginethatusetheclocksignal.

The modules and ASICs then use only the signal from the master source.

PCGs are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4.

Removal or failure of the backup PCG does not affect router function. When the

master PCG fails or is removed from the chassis, however, the Packet Forwarding

Engine resets so that the components start using the signal from the other PCG

(which becomes the master). Packet forwarding halts while there is no clock signal,

because the Packet Forwarding Engine does not accept incoming packets. For

PCG replacement instructions, see “Replacing a PCG” on page 176.

18 Packet Forwarding Engine

Hardware Component Overview

PCG Components

Each PCG (shown in Figure 7) has the following components:

Signal generator—Provides a 125-MHz system clock signal.

EEPROM—Stores the serial number and revision level of the PCG.

Three LEDs—Indicate PCG status. There is a blue one labeled MASTER, a green

one labeled OK, and an amber one labeled FAIL. Table 6 describes the LED states.

Offline button—Prepares the PCG for removal from the router when pressed.

Figure 7: Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generator

1181

Offline button LEDs

Table 6: States for PCG LEDs

Label Color State Description

MASTER Blue On steadily PCG is master.

On steadily PCG is functioning normally.OK Green

Blinking PCG is starting up.

FAIL Amber On steadilyPCG has failed.

Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM)

The Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM) performs route lookup,

filtering, and switching on incoming data packets, then directs outbound

packets to the appropriate FPC for transmission to the network. It can

process 40 million packets per second (Mpps).

Up to four SFMs can be installed in the router, processing a total of 160 Mpps.

The SFMs are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on

page 4. Removing or inserting an SFM causes a brief interruption in forwarding

performance (about 500 ms) as the Packet Forwarding Engine reconfigures

the distribution of packets across the remaining SFMs.

For SFM replacement instructions, see “Replacing an SFM” on page 188.

Packet Forwarding Engine 19

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

The SFM communicates with the Routing Engine using a dedicated 100-Mbps Fast

Ethernet link that transfers routing table data from the Routing Engine to the

forwarding table in the Internet Processor II ASIC. The link is also used to transfer

from the SFM to the Routing Engine routing link-state updates and other packets

destined for the router that have been received through the router interfaces.

The ASICs and other components on the SFM provide the following functions:

Route lookups—The Internet Processor II ASIC on each SFM performs route

lookups using the forwarding table stored in SSRAM.

Management of shared memory on the FPCs—One Distributed Buffer Manager

ASIC receives the 64-byte data cells into which the I/O Manager ASICs on each

FPC divide incoming packets, and uniformly allocates them throughout the

shared memory buffers located on the FPCs.

Transfer of outgoing data packets—The second Distributed Buffer Manager

ASIC passes notification of the forwarding decision for each packet to an I/O

Manager ASIC so that data cells for the outgoing packet can be reassembled

for transmission to the network.

Transfer of exception and control packets—The Internet Processor II ASIC

passes exception packets to the microprocessor on the SFM, which processes

almost all of them. The SFM sends any remaining exception packets to

the Routing Engine for further processing. When the SFM detects an error

originating in the Packet Forwarding Engine, it sends it to the Routing Engine

using system logging (syslog) messages.

SFM Components

EachSFMisatwo-boardsystem,asshowninFigure8. Ithas

the following components:

Two Distributed Buffer Manager ASICs—Process incoming and outgoing

packets: one distributes data cells (which the I/O Manager ASIC on each

FPC derives from incoming packets) to the shared memory buffers on the

20 Packet Forwarding Engine

Hardware Component Overview

FPCs, while the second forwards notification of routing decisions to the

I/O Manager ASICs.

One Internet Processor II ASIC—Performs route lookups and makes routing

decisions.

Parity-protected SSRAM—Stores the forwarding table.

Processor subsystem—Manages SFM functions and handles exception packets.

The processor has the following components:

One PowerPC 603e processor

Parity-protected Level 2 cache

Parity-protected DRAM

EEPROM—Stores the serial number and revision level.

Offline button—Prepares the SFM for removal from the router when pressed.

Two LEDs—Indicate SFM status. There is a green one labeled OK and an amber

one labeled FAIL. Table 7 describes the LED states.

Ejector handles and locking tabs—Control the locking system that secures the

SFMinthechassis.

NOTE: For specific information about SFM components (for example, the amount of

SSRAM and DRAM), issue the show chassis sfm detail command.

Figure 8: Switching and Forwarding Module

1184

Offline button

Ejector handle

Ejector locking tab

LEDs

Packet Forwarding Engine 21

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Table 7: States for SFM LEDs

Label Color State Description

On steadily SFM is functioning normally.OK Green

Blinking SFM is starting up.

FAIL Amber On steadily SFM has failed.

Host Module

The host module constructs routing tables, performs system management

functions, and generates the SONET/SDH clock signal for SONET/SDH interfaces. It

consists of a paired Routing Engine and Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS).

For a host module to function, both of its components—Routing Engine and

MCS—must be installed and operational. One or two host modules can be installed

into the midplane from the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3: the Routing

Engine slot labeled RE 0 is below the MCS slot labeled MCS 0 and the RE 1 slot is

above the MCS 1 slot.

If two host modules are installed, both are powered on, but only one is active (the

master); the second host module is in standby mode and performs no functions.

By default, the master host module is the one with components installed in the

RE 0 and MCS 0 slots. To change the default master Routing Engine, include the

appropriate [edit chassis redundancy routing-engine] statement in the configuration, as

described in the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS Internet

Software Configuration Guide: Getting Started.

The host module components are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs) on page 4. Removal or failure of one or both components in the

standby host module does not affect router function. If one or both components

in the master host module is removed from the chassis, the effect depends on

whether two host modules are installed:

If there is only one host module, packet forwarding halts until both the Routing

Engine and MCS are reinstalled and functioning normally.

If there are two host modules, the effect depends on the software configuration:

If the Routing Engines are running JUNOS Release 6.0 or later and

are configured for graceful switchover, the standby Routing Engine

automatically assumes mastership without interruption of forwarding

performance. For information about configuring graceful switchover, see

the section about Routing Engine redundancy in JUNOS Internet Software

Configuration Guide: Getting Started.

Otherwise, forwarding halts while standby host module becomes the

master and the new master Routing Engine resets the Packet Forwarding

Engine.

22 Host Module

Hardware Component Overview

For host module replacement instructions, see “Replacing an MCS” on page 159

and “Replacing a Routing Engine” on page 165.

Note that the effect of a hardware or software failure on one or both components

in the master host module differs from the effect of removing a component that

belongs to the master host module:

With the default router configuration, in case of failure you must

correct the problem manually. You can issue the appropriate

request chassis routing-engine master commandtoswitchmastershiptotheother

Routing Engine, for example. For information about the command, see the

JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class

of Service, Chassis, and Management.

On routers with two installed Routing Engines running JUNOS Release

6.0 or later, you can configure graceful switchover of Routing Engines, as

previously described for the case of Routing Engine removal. When the

standby Routing Engine stops receiving keepalive signals from the master

Routing Engine, it automatically assumes mastership without interruption of

forwarding performance.

On routers with two installed Routing Engines running any JUNOS release,

you can configure automatic Routing Engine mastership failover. When the

standby Routing Engine stops receiving keepalive signals from the master

Routing Engine, it automatically assumes mastership. Packet forwarding halts

while the Packet Forwarding Engine components reset and connect to the

new master Routing Engine.

For information about configuring graceful switchover or automatic mastership

failover, see the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS Internet

Software Configuration Guide: Getting Started.

For more information about host module components, see the following sections:

Routing Engine on page 23

Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS) on page 25

Routing Engine

The Routing Engine is an Intel-based PCI platform that runs JUNOS Internet

software. Software processes that run on the Routing Engine maintain the

routing tables, manage the routing protocols used on the router, control the

router’s interfaces, control some chassis components, and provide the interface

for system management and user access to the router.

For a description of the Routing Engine’s role in router architecture,

see Routing Engine Architecture on page 53.

One or two host modules (paired Routing Engine and MCS) can be installed

into the midplane from the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. If two

host modules are installed, the Routing Engines together determine which is

Host Module 23

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

the master and which is in standby mode (and so performs no functions). By

default, the Routing Engine in the slot labeled RE0 is the master. The master

Routing Engine also determines which of the two PCGs is the master.

The Routing Engine is hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs) on page 4. For information about the effect of removing a

Routing Engine, see Host Module on page 22. For replacement instructions,

see “Replacing a Routing Engine” on page 165.

Routing Engine Components

TheRoutingEngine(showninFigure9)isatwo-boardsystem

with the following components:

CPU—Runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the router’s routing tables

and routing protocols. It has a Pentium-class processor.

SDRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other

Routing Engine processes.

Compact flash drive—Provides primary storage for software images,

configuration files, and microcode. The drive is fixed and inaccessible from

outside the router.

Hard disk—Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps, and

rebooting the system if the flash drive fails.

PCcardslots—AcceptremovablePCcards,whichstoresoftwareimages

for system upgrades.

LED—Indicates disk activity for the internal IDE interface. It does not

necessarily indicate routing-related activity.

Interfaces for out-of-band management access—Provide information about

Routing Engine status to devices (console, laptop, or terminal server) that can

be attached to access ports located on the Connector Interface Panel (CIP).

EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.

Reset button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.

NOTE: The LEDs that report host module status (and by implication Routing Engine

status) are on the craft interface rather than the Routing Engine faceplate. For more

information, see “Host Module LEDs” on page 31.

NOTE: The appearance and position of electronic components or the PC card

slot on your Routing Engine might differ from Figure 9 and other figures in this

24 Host Module

Hardware Component Overview

document that depict the Routing Engine. These differences do not affect Routing

Engine installation and removal or functionality.

For specific information about Routing Engine components (for example, the

amount of SDRAM), issue the show chassis routing-engine command.

NOTE: If two Routing Engines are installed, they must both be the same version.

Figure 9: Routing Engine

JUNIPER NETWORKS LABEL THIS SIDE

1596

Extractor clip

PC card slot

RESET

Extractor clip

PC card slot

LED

Extractor clipExtractor clip

LED

Routing Engine 333 Routing Engine 600

Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS)

The Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS) works with its companion Routing

Engine to provide control and monitoring functions for router components. It also

generates a clock signal for the SONET/SDH interfaces on the router.

One or two host modules (paired MCS and Routing Engine) can be installed

into the midplane from the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. Only

one host module is active at a time, with the optional second host module in

standby mode. For more information about host module interdependence

and redundancy, see Host Module on page 22.

The MCS performs the following functions:

Monitoring and control of router components—The MCS collects statistics

from all sensors in the system. When it detects a failure or alarm condition,

it sends a signal to the Routing Engine, which generates control messages

Host Module 25

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

or sets an alarm. The MCS also relays control messages from the Routing

Engine to the router components.

Controlling component power-up and power-down—The MCS controls the

power-up sequence of router components as they start, and powers down

components when their offline buttons are pressed.

Signaling of mastership—In a router with more than one host module, the

MCS signals to all router components which host module is the master and

which is the standby. It relays the mastership signal for the two PCGs as well.

Providing SONET/SDH clock source—The MCS generates a 19.44-MHz

SONET/SDH clock signal, along with a signal that indicates which MCS is the

master SONET/SDH clock generator (if two MCSs are installed).

Clock monitoring—The MCS monitors the PCG system clock and its

SONET/SDH clock to verify that they are providing the expected signal. It

generates an alarm if a clock signal is incorrect.

Control of FPC resets—If the MCS detects errors in an FPC, it attempts to

reset the FPC. After three unsuccessful reset attempts, the MCS takes the

FPC offline and informs the Routing Engine. Other FPCs are unaffected,

and system operation continues.

MCS Components

Each MCS (shown in Figure 10) has the following components:

PCI interface—Connects the MCS to the Routing Engine.

100-Mbps Ethernet switch—Carries signals and monitoring data between

router components.

19.44-MHz stratum 3 reference clock—Generates clock signal for SONET/SDH

PICs.

I2C controller—Monitors the status of router components.

Three LEDs—Indicate MCS status. There is a blue one labeled MASTER, a green

one labeled OK, and an amber one labeled FAIL. Table 8 describes the LED states.

Offline button—Prepares the MCS for removal from the router when pressed.

Extractor clips—Control the locking system that secures the MCS in the chassis.

26 Host Module

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 10: Miscellaneous Control Subsystem

1178

Extractor clip

Offline button LEDs

Table 8: States for MCS LEDs

Label Color State Description

MASTER Blue On steadily MCS is master.

On steadily MCS is functioning normally.OK Green

Blinking MCS is starting up.

FAIL Amber On steadilyMCS has failed.

Craft Interface

Thecraftinterfaceprovidesstatusandtroubleshootinginformationataglanceand

has buttons for deactivating alarms and preparing FPCs for removal. The craft

interface is located on the front of the chassis above the FPC card cage, as shown in

Figure 1. It includes the elements shown in Figure 11.

Craft Interface 27

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 11: Craft Interface

1231

HOST1

FPC 7

FPC 6

FAIL

OK FAIL

FPC 5

FPC 3

OK OK OK

HOST0

FPC 2

FAIL

FPC 4

FPC 0 FPC 1

FAIL

ACO/LT

MASTER

OFFLINE ONLINE

MASTER

OFFLINE ONLINE

ENTER

FPC LEDs and offline buttons (for FPC 0-7)

Host module

LEDs

Navigation

buttons

LCDNavigation

buttons

Alarm cutoff

button

Red alarm

LED

Yellow alarm

LED

NOTE: The LEDs for some router components are located on the component

faceplate, rather than on the craft interface. For information about those LEDs, see

the following sections:

“PCG Components” on page 19

“SFM Components” on page 20

“MCS Components” on page 26

Power System on page 35

For information about the elements on the craft interface, see the following sections:

Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on page 28

LCD and Navigation Buttons on page 29

Host Module LEDs on page 31

FPC LEDs and Offline Button on page 31

Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button

Two large alarm LEDs are located at the upper left of the craft interface

(see Figure 11). The circular red LED lights to indicate a critical condition

that can result in a system shutdown. The triangular yellow LED lights to

indicate a less severe condition that requires monitoring or maintenance.

Both LEDs can be lit simultaneously.

A condition that causes an LED to light also activates the corresponding alarm

relay contact on the connector interface panel (CIP), as described in “Alarm

28 Craft Interface

Hardware Component Overview

Relay Contacts” on page 34. The LCD on the craft interface reports the cause

of the alarm, as described in “LCD Alarm Mode” on page 30.

To deactivate red and yellow alarms, press the button labeled ACO/LT (for “alarm

cutoff/lamp test”), which is located to the left of the alarm LEDs. Deactivating an

alarm turns off both LEDs and deactivates the device attached to the corresponding

alarm relay contact on the CIP. However, the LCD continues to report the alarm

message until you clear the condition that caused the alarm.

Table 9 describes the alarm LEDs and alarm cutoff button in more detail.

Table 9: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button

Shape Color State Description

Red On steadily Critical alarm LED—Indicates a critical condition

that can cause the router to stop functioning.

Possible causes include component removal,

failure, or overheating.

Yellow On steadily Warning alarm LED—Indicates a serious but

nonfatal error condition, such as a maintenance

alert or a significant increase in component

temperature.

——Alarm cutoff/lamp test button—Deactivates red

and yellow alarms. Causes all LEDs on the craft

interface to light (for testing purposes), when

pressed and held.

LCD and Navigation Buttons

A four-line LCD is located in the craft interface, along with six navigation buttons.

The LCD operates in two modes, as described in the following sections:

LCDIdleModeonpage29

LCD Alarm Mode on page 30

LCD Idle Mode

During normal operation, the LCD operates in idle mode and reports

current status information, as shown in Figure 12.

Craft Interface 29

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 12: LCD in Idle Mode

ENTER

1263

Router1

Up 2 + 11:59

Power OK

The lines in the display report the following information:

First line—Routing node name.

Second line—Length of time the router has been running, reported in the

following form:

Up days +hours :minutes

Third and fourth lines—Status messages, which rotate at two-second intervals.

Some conditions, such as removal or insertion of a system component,

can interrupt the messages.

To add a message that alternates every 2 seconds with the default status

messages, use the set chassis display message command. For more information,

see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference:

Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.

LCD Alarm Mode

When a red or yellow alarm occurs, the LCD switches to alarm mode and

reports about the alarm condition, as shown in Figure 13.

Figure 13: LCD in Alarm Mode

ENTER

1264

Router1

R: PEM 1 Input Failure

Y: Change air filter

30 Craft Interface

Hardware Component Overview

The lines in the display report the following information:

First line—Routing node name.

Second line—Number of active alarms.

Third and fourth lines—Individual alarm messages, with the most severe

condition shown first. The prefix on each line indicates whether the alarm is a

red (R) or yellow (Y) alarm.

For a list of alarm messages that can appear on the LCD, see “Chassis

and Interface Alarm Messages” on page 209.

Host Module LEDs

Attheupperrightcornerofthecraftinterface(seeFigure11)aretwosetsofLEDs

that indicate host module status: the set labeled HOST0 reports the status of the

Routing Engine in slot RE 0 and MCS in slot MCS 0, and the set labeled HOST1 reports

thestatusoftheRoutingEngineinslotRE 1 and the MCS in slot MCS 1.Eachset

includes three LEDs—a green one labeled MASTER, another green one labeled

ONLINE, and a red one labeled OFFLINE. Table 10 describes the LED states.

Table 10: States for Host Module LEDs

Label Color State Description

MASTER Green On steadily Host module is functioning as master.

On steadily Host module components (Routing Engine and

MCS) are installed and functioning normally.

ONLINE Green

Blinking Host module is starting up.

OFFLINE Red On steadily One or both host module components are not

installed or have failed.

FPC LEDs and Offline Button

The LEDS and offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the

craft interface, as shown in Figure 11. The red LED labeled FAIL and the green

LED labeled OK indicate FPC status, as described in Table 11.

The offline button, labeled with the FPC slot number (for example, FPC2),

prepares the FPC for removal from the router when pressed.

Craft Interface 31

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Table 11: States for FPC LEDs

Label Color State Description

On steadily FPC is functioning normally.

Blinking FPC is starting up or going offline.

OK Green

Off FPC is offline or not installed.

FAIL Red On steadily FPC has failed.

Connector Interface Panel (CIP)

The Connector Interface Panel (CIP) is located at the left side of the FPC card cage,

as shown in Figure 1. It houses Routing Engine management ports and alarm relay

contacts, as shown in Figure 14 and described in the following sections:

Routing Engine Management Ports on page 33

BITS Input Ports on page 34

Alarm Relay Contacts on page 34

32 Connector Interface Panel (CIP)

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 14: Connector Interface Panel

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

AUXILIARY

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

BITS A

BITS B

LINK

RED ALARM

YELLOW

ALARM

LINK

1204

Alarm relay

contacts

BITS

input ports

Routing

Engine ports

Routing Engine Management Ports

On the upper half of the CIP are two sets of ports for connecting the Routing

Engines to one or more external devices on which system administrators can issue

JUNOS command-line interface (CLI) commands to manage the router. The set of

ports labeled HOST0 connects to the Routing Engine in the slot labeled RE 0,andthe

set labeled HOST1 connects to the Routing Engine in the slot labeled RE 1.

Connector Interface Panel (CIP) 33

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

The ports with the indicated label in each set function as follows:

ETHERNET—Connects the Routing Engine through an Ethernet connection to a

management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection)

for out-of-band management. The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to

support both 10- and 100-Mbps connections. Two small LEDs on the left edge

of the port indicate the connection in use: the LED labeled ETHERNET lights

yellow or green for a 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps connection, and the LED labeled

ACT lights green when traffic is passing through the port.

CONSOLE—Connects the Routing Engine to a system console through an

RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable.

AUXILIARY— Connects the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other

auxiliary device through an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable.

For information about the pinouts for the connectors, see “Cable

Connector Pinouts” on page 269.

Figure 15 shows the ports that connect to the Routing Engine installed in slot RE 0.

The arrangement of ports for the Routing Engine installed in slot RE 1 is the same.

Figure 15: Routing Engine Interface Ports for Host Module 0

Ethernet

LEDs

Ethernet port

Console port

Auxiliary port

1236

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

AUXILIARY

BITS Input Ports

In the center of the CIP are two ports labeled BITS A and BITS B (see Figure 16). The

router does not support BITS input, so these ports do not function.

Alarm Relay Contacts

At the bottom of the CIP are two relay contacts for connecting the router to

external alarm-reporting devices, the upper labeled RED ALARM and the lower

34 Connector Interface Panel (CIP)

Hardware Component Overview

YELLOW ALARM (see Figure 16). A system condition that causes the red or yellow

alarm LED to light on the craft interface also activates the corresponding alarm

relay contact. For instructions for attaching a device to the alarm relay contacts,

see “Connecting to an External Alarm-Reporting Device” on page 115.

Figure 16: Alarm Relay Contacts and BITS Input Ports

BITS A

BITS B

LINK

RED ALARM

YELLOW

ALARM

LINK

1173

Alarm relay

contacts

BITS

input ports

Power System

The router uses DC power. There are two load-sharing, pass-through power supplies

located at the bottom rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. The power supplies

connect to the midplane, which distributes power to router components according

to their individual voltage requirements. When the power supplies are installed

and operational, they automatically share the electrical load. If a power supply

stops functioning for any reason, the remaining power supplies instantly begin

providing all the power the router needs for normal functioning and can provide

full power indefinitely.

Power supplies are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in

Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4. To avoid electrical injury, carefully follow

the instructions in “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 197.

NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning

it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before

turning it off.

If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply,

the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If

Power System 35

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router

again, first issue the CLI request system halt command. For more information, see

“Disconnecting Power from the Router” on page 200.

After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status

indicators—such as LEDs on the power supply, show chassis commands, and

messages on the craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is

functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.

See the following sections for further information:

Power Supply on page 36

Circuit Breaker Box on page 38

Fuses on page 39

Power Supply

The router has two load-sharing, pass-through power supplies, located at the

bottom rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. For information about power

supply redundancy and replaceability, see Power System on page 35.

Each power supply has the following components (see Figure 17 and Figure 18):

LEDs—Indicate power supply status. There is a green one labeled CB ON,a

blue one labeled OUTPUT OK, and an amber one labeled CB OFF.Theoriginal

power supply also has an amber LED labeled NO AIRFLOW. Table 12 describes

the LED states.

In addition, power supply failure triggers the red alarm LED on the craft

interface and the RED ALARM relay contact on the CIP. See “Alarm LEDs and

Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button” on page 28.

Self-test button—Tests the power supply. Do not press this button; it is for use

by qualified service personnel only.

36 Power System

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 17: Original Power Supply

CB ON

CB OFF

OUTPUT OK

NO AIRFLOW

PEM

SELF TEST

1219

Figure 18: Enhanced Power Supply

CB ON

TURN OFF CIRCUIT

BREAKER BEFORE REMOVING

OR INSERTING PEM.

INSERT PEM THEN

TURN ON CIRCUIT

BREAKER AFTER 1 MINUTE.

ENHANCED PEM

CAUTION

CB OFF

OUTPUT OK

PEM

SELF TEST

1266

TIGHTEN THESE SCREWS FIRST

Table 12: States for Power Supply LEDs

Label Color State Description

CB ON Green On steadily Power supply is inserted correctly and is receiving

power. Circuit breaker is on.

On steadily Power supply is inserted and is functioning

normally.

OUTPUT OK Blue

Blinking Power supply is not functioning, is starting up, or is

not properly inserted, or airflow is not sufficient.

Power System 37

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Label Color State Description

AIRFLOW

(original

power

supply only)

Amber On steadily Power supply is inserted, but airflow around the

power supply is not sufficient.

CB OFF Amber On steadily Power supply is functioning, but the circuit breaker

is off.

Table 13 lists electrical specifications for the power supply.

Table 13: Electrical Specifications for Power Supply

DescriptionSpecification

Maximum power output Original power supply: 2400 W; nonisolated

Enhanced power supply: 3000 W; nonisolated

DC input voltage Nominal: –48 VDC, –60 VDC

Operating range: –42 to –72 VDC

DC input current rating 80 A @ –48 V

Output voltages +48 V @ 8.3 A (cooling system), +8.3 V @ 6 A (bias), –48 V to

–60 V@ 75 A

Circuit Breaker Box

The circuit breaker box is located on the rear of the chassis, above the

right power supply, as shown in Figure 2.

The circuit breaker box houses two circuit breakers and sets of terminal studs,

corresponding positionally to the two power supplies, as shown in Figure 19.

For proper router operation and power load sharing, connect a different

external DC power source to each set of terminal studs.

In addition, a grounding cable attaches to separate grounding points located

above the circuit breaker box, as shown in Figure 2. For more information, see

“Power, Connection, and Cable Specifications” on page 67.

38 Power System

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 19: Circuit Breaker Box

1225

Fuses

The router uses fuses from the Cooper Bussman brand GMT series for the FPCs,

MCSs, PCGs, and SFMs. The fuses are located in a fuse box on the rear of the

midplane. When the fuse for a component blows, the component stops functioning

even though it is installed correctly and the power supplies are providing power to

the router. For more information, see “Blown Fuse Indicators” on page 211. For

fuse replacement instructions, see “Replacing a Fuse” on page 204.

Cooling System

The cooling system includes a fan tray and several impellers that draw room air into

the chassis to keep its internal temperature below a maximum acceptable level.

When the temperature is below the maximum, the fans and impellers function

at less than full speed. If the MCS detects that the temperature of a component

has exceeded the acceptable maximum—for example, because an impeller is

removed—it automatically increases the speed of the remaining impellers and fans

to reduce the temperature. The fans and impellers can function at the higher

speed indefinitely.

For more information about the cooling system, see the following sections:

Cooling System Components on page 40

Airflow through the Chassis on page 40

Cooling System 39

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Cooling System Components

The cooling system has the following components. All are hot-removable and

hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4.

Air intake vent, air filter, and intake cover—Provide an opening for room air to

enter the router. They are located at the bottom of the chassis front, below the

cable management system, as shown in Figure 1. The air filter is removable

and covers the air intake vent, preventing dust and other particles from

entering the cooling system. For maintenance and replacement instructions,

see “Maintaining the Air Filter” on page 128. The nonremovable air intake

cover is located behind the air filter and provides EMC shielding.

CAUTION: Do not remove the air filter for more than a few minutes while the

router is operating. The fans and impellers are powerful enough to draw in foreign

material, such as bits of wire, through the unfiltered air intake, which could damage

router components.

Front cooling subsystem—Cools the FPCs, PICs, and midplane. It includes a fan

tray located behind the cable management system and a large, central impeller

behind the craft interface. For replacement instructions, see “Replacing the Fan

Tray” on page 148 and “Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly” on page 150.

Rear cooling subsystem—Cools the SFMs, host module, PCGs, and power

supplies. It includes one impeller located at the upper right of the chassis

rear and another at the lower left, as shown in Figure 2. The upper and

lower impellers are not interchangeable. For replacement instructions, see

“Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly” on page 154 and “Replacing

the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly” on page 156.

Airflow through the Chassis

Figure 20 shows airflow through the chassis and the location of

the impellers and fan tray.

40 Cooling System

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 20: Airflow through the Chassis

Side view

Front

Rear

Front view Top view

Impeller

(upper front)

Impeller

Card cage

Fan tray

1170

Front Rear

(upper rear)

Air intake cover

Impeller

Cable Management System

The cable management system (see Figure 21) consists of a row of nine

semicircular plastic bobbins mounted on the front of the router below the FPC

card cage. The PIC cables pass between the bobbins and into the tray, keeping

the cables organized and securely in place. The curvature of the bobbins also

helps maintain the proper bend radius for optical PIC cables.

Figure 21: Cable Management System

1938

Cable management

system

Cable Management System 41

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

42 Cable Management System

Chapter 3

JUNOS Internet Software Overview

The JUNOS Internet software is especially designed for the large production

networks typically supported by Internet Service Providers (ISPs). It incorporates

Internet Protocol (IP) routing software and software for management of interfaces,

networks, and the router chassis.

TheJUNOSInternetsoftwarerunsontheRoutingEngine.Thesoftwareconsistsof

processes that support Internet routing protocols, control the router’s interfaces

and the router chassis itself, and provide an interface for system management.

The processes run on top of a kernel that coordinates the communication among

processes and has a direct link to the Packet Forwarding Engine software.

Use the JUNOS Internet software to configure the routing protocols that run on

the router and the properties of router interfaces. After you have activated a

software configuration, use the JUNOS Internet software to monitor the protocol

traffic passing through the router and to troubleshoot protocol and network

connectivity problems.

For additional information about the JUNOS Internet software, including its security

features and a list of the industry standards it supports, see the JUNOS System Basics

Configuration Guide. For complete information about configuring the software,

including examples, see the JUNOS Internet software configuration guides.

This chapter discusses the following topics:

Routing Engine Software Components on page 43

Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software on page 50

Tools for Monitoring the Software on page 50

Software Upgrades on page 50

Routing Engine Software Components

The Routing Engine software consists of several software processes that control

router functions and a kernel that coordinates communication among the

processes, as described in the following sections:

Routing Protocol Process on page 44

Routing Engine Software Components 43

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

VPNs on page 48

Interface Process on page 49

Chassis Process on page 49

SNMP and MIB II Processes on page 49

Management Process on page 49

Routing Engine Kernel on page 49

Routing Protocol Process

The JUNOS software routing protocol process controls the routing protocols that

run on the router. The routing protocol process starts all configured routing

protocols and handles all routing messages. It consolidates the routing information

learned from all routing protocols into common routing tables. From this routing

information, the routing protocol process determines the active routes to network

destinations and installs these routes into the Routing Engine’s forwarding table.

Finally, the routing protocol process implements the routing policies you specify,

which determine how routing information is transferred between the routing

protocols and the routing table.

This section discusses the following topics:

IPv4 Routing Protocols on page 44

IPv6 Routing Protocols on page 46

Routing and Forwarding Tables on page 47

Routing Policy on page 47

For complete information about routing concepts, see the JUNOS

Internet software configuration guides.

IPv4 Routing Protocols

The JUNOS Internet software implements full IP routing functionality,

providing support for IP version 4 (IPv4). The routing protocols are fully

interoperable with existing IP routing protocols and provide the scale and

control necessary for the Internet core. The software provides support for

the following routing and traffic engineering protocols:

Unicast routing protocols

BGP—Border Gateway Protocol, version 4, is an Exterior Gateway Protocol

(EGP) that guarantees loop-free exchange of routing information between

routing domains (also called autonomous systems). BGP, in conjunction

44 Routing Engine Software Components

JUNOS Internet Software Overview

with JUNOS routing policy, provides a system of administrative checks and

balances that can be used to implement peering and transit agreements.

ICMP—Internet Control Message Protocol router discovery is a method

that hosts can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a

subnet.

IS-IS—Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System is a link-state interior

gateway protocol (IGP) for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first

algorithm (SPF algorithm, also called the Dijkstra algorithm) to determine

routes.

OSPF—Open Shortest Path First, version 2, is an IGP developed for

IP networks by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). OSPF is

a link-state protocol that makes routing decisions based on the SPF

algorithm.

RIP—Routing Information Protocol, version 2, is an IGP for IP networks

based on the Bellman-Ford algorithm. RIP is a distance-vector protocol.

RIP dynamically routes packets between a subscriber and a service

provider without the subscriber having to configure BGP or to participate

in the service provider’s IGP discovery process.

Multicast routing protocols

DVMRP—Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a dense-mode

(flood-and-prune) multicast routing protocol.

IGMP—Internet Group Management Protocol, versions 1 and 2, is used

to manage membership in multicast groups.

MSDP—Multicast Source Discovery Protocol enables multiple PIM sparse

mode domains to be joined. A rendezvous point (RP) in a PIM sparse

mode domain has a peering relationship with an RP in another domain,

thereby discovering multicast sources from other domains.

PIM sparse mode and dense mode—Protocol-Independent Multicast is a

multicast routing protocol used to route traffic to multicast groups that

might span wide-area and interdomain internetworks. In PIM sparse

mode, routers explicitly join and leave multicast groups. PIM dense

mode is a flood-and-prune protocol.

SAP/SDP—Session Announcement Protocol and Session Description

Protocol handle conference session announcements.

MPLS application protocols

LDP—Label Distribution Protocol provides a mechanism for distributing

labels in nontraffic-engineered applications. LDP allows routers to

establish label-switched paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping

network-layer routing information directly to data-link layer switched

Routing Engine Software Components 45

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

paths. LSPs created by LDP can also traverse LSPs created by Resource

Reservation Protocol (RSVP).

MPLS—Multiprotocol Label Switching enables you to configure LSPs

through a network either manually or dynamically. You can control how

traffic traverses the network by directing it through particular paths,

rather than relying on an IGP’s least-cost algorithm to choose a path.

RSVP—Resource Reservation Protocol, version 1, provides a mechanism

for engineering network traffic patterns that is independent of the

shortest path determined by a routing protocol. RSVP itself is not a

routing protocol, but is designed to operate with current and future

unicast and multicast routing protocols. JUNOS RSVP software supports

dynamic signaling for MPLS LSPs.

IPv6 Routing Protocols

The JUNOS Internet software implements full IP routing functionality,

providing support for IP version 6 (IPv6). The routing protocols are fully

interoperable with existing IP routing protocols and provide the scale and

control necessary for the Internet core. The software provides support

for the following unicast routing protocols:

BGP—Border Gateway Protocol, version 4, is an EGP that guarantees loop-free

exchange of routing information between routing domains (also called

autonomous systems). BGP, in conjunction with JUNOS routing policy, provides

a system of administrative checks and balances that can be used to implement

peering and transit agreements.

ICMP—Internet Control Message Protocol router discovery is a method that

hosts can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a subnet.

IS-IS—Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System is a link-state interior

gateway protocol (IGP) for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first

algorithm (SPF algorithm, also called the Dijkstra algorithm) to determine

routes.

OSPF—Open Shortest Path First, version 3 (OSPFv3), supports version 6 of

the Internet Protocol (IPv6). The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF such as

flooding, Designated Router (DR) election, area based topologies and the

Shortest Path First (SPF) calculations remain unchanged. Some differences

exist either due to changes in protocol semantics between IPv4 and IPv6, or to

handle the increased address size of IPv6.

RIP—Routing Information Protocol, version 2, is an IGP for IP networks

based on the Bellman-Ford algorithm. RIP is a distance-vector protocol. RIP

dynamically routes packets between a subscriber and a service provider

without the subscriber having to configure BGP or to participate in the service

provider’s IGP discovery process.

46 Routing Engine Software Components

JUNOS Internet Software Overview

Routing and Forwarding Tables

The primary function of the JUNOS routing protocol process is maintaining routing

tables and using the information in them to determine active routes to network

destinations. It copies information about the active routes into the Routing Engine’s

forwarding table, which the JUNOS kernel copies to the Packet Forwarding Engine.

By default, the routing protocol process maintains the following routing tables and

uses the information in each table to determine active routes to network destinations:

Unicast routing table—Stores routing information for all unicast protocols

running on the router, including BGP, IS-IS, OSPF, and RIP. You can also

configure additional routes, such as static routes, for inclusion in the routing

table. The unicast routing protocols use the routes in this table when

advertising routing information to their neighbors.

In the unicast routing table, the routing protocol process designates routes with

the lowest preference values as active. By default, a route’s preference value is

simply a function of how the routing protocol process learned about the route.

You can modify the default preference value by setting routing policies and

configuring other software parameters. See “Routing Policy” on page 47.

Multicast routing table (cache)—Stores routing information for all multicast

protocols running on the router, including DVMRP and PIM. You can configure

additional routes for inclusion in the routing table.

In the multicast routing table, the routing protocol process uses traffic flow and

other parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol algorithms to

select active routes.

MPLS routing table—Stores MPLS label information.

For unicast routes, the routing protocol process determines active routes by

choosing the most preferred route, which is the route with the lowest preference

value. By default, the route’s preference value is simply a function of how the

routing protocol process learned about the route. You can modify the default

preference value using routing policy and with software configuration parameters.

For multicast traffic, the routing protocol process determines active routes based

on traffic flow and other parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol

algorithms. The routing protocol process then installs one or more active routes to

each network destination into the Routing Engine’s forwarding table.

You can configure additional routing tables to meet your requirements, as

described in the JUNOS Routing Protocols Configuration Guide.

Routing Policy

By default, all routing protocols place their routes into the routing table.

When advertising routes, the routing protocols, by default, advertise only

a limited set of routes from the routing table. Specifically, each routing

protocol exports only the active routes that were learned by that protocol.

Routing Engine Software Components 47

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

In addition, IGPs (IS-IS, OSPF, and RIP) export the direct (interface) routes

for the interfaces on which the protocol is explicitly configured.

For each routing table, you can affect the routes that a protocol places into the table

and the routes from the table that the protocol advertises by defining one or more

routing policies and then applying them to the specific routing protocol.

Routing policies applied when the routing protocol places routes into the routing

table are called import policies because the routes are being imported into

the routing table. Policies applied when the routing protocol is advertising

routes that are in the routing table are called export policies because the

routes are being exported from the routing table. In other words, the terms

import and export are used with respect to the routing table.

Routing policy enables you to control (filter) which routes are imported into the

routing table and which routes are exported from the routing table. Routing policy

also allows you to set the information associated with a route as it is being imported

into or exported from the routing table. Routing policies applied to imported routes

control the routes used to determine active routes, whereas policies applied to

exported routes control which routes a protocol advertises to its neighbors.

You implement routing policy by defining policies. A policy specifies the conditions

tousetomatcharouteandtheactiontoperformontheroutewhenamatch

occurs. For example, when a routing table imports routing information from a

routing protocol, a routing policy might modify the route’s preference, mark the

route with a color to identify it for later manipulation, or prevent the route from

even being installed in a routing table. When a routing table exports routes to a

routing protocol, a policy might assign metric values, modify the BGP community

information, tag the route with additional information, or prevent the route

from being exported altogether. You also can define policies for redistributing

the routes learned from one protocol into another protocol.

VPNs

The JUNOS software supports several types of VPNs:

Layer 2 VPNs—A Layer 2 VPN links a set of sites sharing common routing

information, and whose connectivity is controlled by a collection of policies. A

Layer 2 VPN is not aware of routes within a customer’s network. It simply

provides private links between a customer’s sites over the service provider’s

existing public Internet backbone.

Layer3VPNs—ALayer3VPNlinksasetofsitesthatsharecommonrouting

information, and whose connectivity is controlled by a collection of policies.

A Layer 3 VPN is aware of routes within a customer’s network, requiring

more configuration on the part of the service provider than a Layer 2 VPN.

The sites that make up a Layer 3 VPN are connected over a service provider’s

existing public Internet backbone.

Interprovider VPNs—An interprovider VPN supplies connectivity between two

VPNs in separate autonomous systems (ASs). This functionality could be used

48 Routing Engine Software Components

JUNOS Internet Software Overview

by a VPN customer with connections to several various ISPs, or different

connections to the same ISP in various geographic regions.

Carrier-of-Carrier VPNs—Carrier-of-carrier VPNs allow a VPN service provider

to supply VPN service to a customer who is also a service provider. The latter

service provider supplies Internet or VPN service to an end customer.

Interface Process

The JUNOS interface process manages the physical interface devices and logical

interfaces on the router. It implements the JUNOS command-line interface

(CLI) commands and configuration statements that you use to specify interface

properties such as location (FPC location in the FPC card cage and PIC location

on an FPC), the interface type (such as SONET/SDH or ATM), encapsulation,

and interface-specific properties. You can configure both interfaces that are

currently active and interfaces that might be installed later.

The JUNOS interface process communicates with the interface process in the

Packet Forwarding Engine through the JUNOS kernel, enabling the JUNOS Internet

software to track the status and condition of router interfaces.

Chassis Process

The JUNOS chassis process allows you to configure and control the properties of

the router, including conditions that trigger alarms and clock sources. The chassis

process communicates directly with a chassis process in the JUNOS kernel.

SNMP and MIB II Processes

The JUNOS Internet software supports the Simple Network Management

Protocol (SNMP), versions 1, 2, and 3, which provides a mechanism for

monitoring the state of the router. This software is controlled by the JUNOS

SNMP and Management Information Base (MIB) II processes, which consist

of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent.

Management Process

The management process starts all the other JUNOS software processes and the

CLI when the router boots. It monitors the running JUNOS processes and makes

all reasonable attempts to restart any process that terminates.

Routing Engine Kernel

The Routing Engine kernel provides the underlying infrastructure for all JUNOS

software processes. It also provides the link between the routing tables maintained

by the routing protocol process and the forwarding table maintained by the Routing

Engine. Additionally, it coordinates communication with the Packet Forwarding

Engine, which primarily involves synchronizing the Packet Forwarding Engine’s

forwarding table with the master forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine.

Routing Engine Software Components 49

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software

The JUNOS CLI is the primary tool for accessing and controlling the JUNOS Internet

software. You use it when accessing the router through the console or a connection

to an out-of-band management network. The CLI includes commands for

configuring router hardware, the JUNOS Internet software, and network connectivity.

The JUNOS CLI is a straightforward command interface. You type commands

on a single line and enter the commands by pressing the Enter key. The CLI

provides command help and command completion, as well as Emacs-style

keyboard sequences for moving around on a command line and scrolling through

a buffer that contains recently executed commands. For more information

about the CLI, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

Tools for Monitoring the Software

In addition to commands for configuring router hardware and software, the CLI

includes commands for monitoring and troubleshooting hardware, software, routing

protocols, and network connectivity. CLI commands display information from

routing tables, information specific to routing protocols, and information about

network connectivity derived from the ping and traceroute utilities.

You can also use the JUNOS Internet software implementation of SNMP to monitor

routers. The SNMP software consists of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent.

It provides full support for MIB II SNMP version 1 traps and version 2 notifications,

SNMP version 1 Get and GetNext requests, and version 2 GetBulk requests. For more

information about SNMP, see the JUNOS Network Management Configuration Guide.

The software also supports tracing and logging operations, which you can use

to track normal router operations, error conditions, and the packets that the

router generates or forwards. Logging operations use a syslog-like mechanism to

record systemwide, high-level events such as interfaces going up or down and

user logins on the router. Tracing operations record more detailed information

about the operation of routing protocols, such as the various types of routing

protocol packets sent and received, and routing policy actions.

Software Upgrades

The router is delivered with the JUNOS Internet software preinstalled. To upgrade

the software, you use CLI commands to copy a set of software images over the

network to memory storage on the Routing Engine. The JUNOS Internet software

setconsistsofseveralimagesprovidedinindividualpackagesorasabundle.You

normally upgrade all packages simultaneously. For information about installing and

upgrading JUNOS software, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

50 Software Upgrades

Chapter 4

System Architecture Overview

The router architecture consists of two major components:

Packet Forwarding Engine—Performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching,

route lookups, and packet forwarding.

Routing Engine—Provides Layer 3 routing services and network management.

The Packet Forwarding Engine and the Routing Engine perform independently but

communicate constantly through a 100-Mbps internal link. This arrangement

provides streamlined forwarding and routing control and the ability to run

Internet-scale networks at high speeds. Figure 22 illustrates the relationship

between the Packet Forwarding Engine and the Routing Engine.

Figure 22: System Architecture

Packet Forwarding

Engine

Routing Engine

1244

Packets

out

100-Mbps link

For a discussion of the architectural components, see the following sections:

Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture on page 51

RoutingEngineArchitectureonpage53

Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture

The Packet Forwarding Engine performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching.

It can forward up to 160 for all packet sizes. The aggregate throughput for the

router is 160 gigabits per second (Gbps) simplex or 80 Gbps full duplex. The

Packet Forwarding Engine is implemented in application-specific integrated circuits

(ASICs). It uses a centralized route lookup engine and shared memory.

Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture 51

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

The Packet Forwarding Engine architecture includes the following components:

Midplane—Transports packets, notifications, and other signals between the

FPCs and the Packet Forwarding Engine (as well as other system components).

Physical Interface Card (PIC)—Physically connects the router to fiber-optic

or digital network media. A controller ASIC in each PIC performs control

functions specific to the PIC media type.

Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC)—Houses PICs and provides shared memory

for processing incoming and outgoing packets. Each FPC hosts four I/O

Manager ASICs, which divide incoming data packets into memory blocks (cells)

before passing them to the SFMs, and reassembles cells into data packets when

the packets are ready for transmission. The FPC also hosts two Packet Director

ASICs—one distributes incoming packets among the I/O Manager ASICs, and

the other distributes outgoing packets to the appropriate PICs on the FPC.

Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM)—Hosts an Internet Processor II ASIC,

which makes forwarding decisions, and two Distributed Buffer Manager ASICs:

one distributes data cells to the shared memory buffers on the FPCs and the

other notifies the FPCs of forwarding decisions for outgoing packets.

Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine

Use of ASICs promotes efficient movement of data packets through

the system. Packets flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine in

the following sequence (see Figure 23):

1. Packets arrive at an incoming PIC interface.

2. The PIC passes the packets to the FPC, where the Packet Director ASIC

distributes them among the I/O Manager ASICs.

3. The I/O Manager ASICs process the packet headers, divide the packets into

64-byte data cells, and pass the cells through the midplane to the SFMs.

4. The Distributed Buffer Manager ASICs on the SFMs distribute the data cells

throughout memory buffers located on and shared by all the FPCs.

5. For each packet, an Internet Processor II ASIC on an SFM performs a route

lookup and decides how to forward the packet.

6. The Internet Processor II ASIC notifies a Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC of

the forwarding decision, and the Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC forwards the

notification to the FPC that hosts the appropriate outbound interface.

7. The I/O Manager ASIC on the FPC reassembles data cells in shared memory

into data packets as they are ready for transmission and passes them through

the Packet Director ASIC to the outbound PIC.

8. The outbound PIC transmits the data packets.

52 Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture

System Architecture Overview

Figure 23: Packet Forwarding Engine Components and Data Flow

1234

= ASIC

Distributed

Buffer

Manager

SFM

Routing

Engine

Internet

Processor II

Packet

Director

FPC

I/O

Manager

Packet

out

PIC

Controller

Midplane

Routing Engine Architecture

The Routing Engine is an Intel-based PCI platform running the JUNOS Internet

software, which Juniper Networks has developed and optimized to handle

large numbers of network interfaces and routes. The software consists of

a set of system processes running in protected memory modules on top

of an independent operating system. The JUNOS kernel supports JUNOS

system processes, which handle system management processes, routing

protocols, and control functions (see Figure 24).

The Routing Engine has a dedicated 100-Mbps internal connection

to the Packet Forwarding Engine.

Routing Engine Architecture 53

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 24: Routing Engine Architecture

JUNOS

software

System

management

processes

Routing

protocols

Control

functions System processes

Operating system

Kernel

Intel-based PCI platform

1164

Routing Engine Functions

The Routing Engine handles all routing protocol processes, as well as

the software processes that control the router’s interfaces, the chassis

components, system management, and user access to the router. These

routing and software processes run on top of a kernel that interacts with the

Packet Forwarding Engine. For more information about the processes, see

Routing Engine Software Components on page 43.

The Routing Engine includes the following functions and features:

Processing of routing protocol packets—The Routing Engine handles all

packets that concern routing protocols, freeing the Packet Forwarding Engine

to handle only packets that represent Internet traffic.

Software modularity—Because each software process is devoted to a different

function and uses a separate process space, the failure of one process has little

or no effect on the others.

In-depth Internet functionality—Each routing protocol is implemented with a

complete set of Internet features and provides full flexibility for advertising,

filtering, and modifying routes. Routing policies are set according to route

parameters (for example, prefix, prefix lengths, and Border Gateway Protocol

[BGP] attributes).

Scalability—The JUNOS routing tables have been designed to hold all the

routes in current networks with ample capacity for expansion. Additionally, the

54 Routing Engine Architecture

System Architecture Overview

JUNOS Internet software can efficiently support large numbers of interfaces

and virtual circuits.

Management interface—Different levels of system management tools are

provided, including the JUNOS command-line interface (CLI), the JUNOScript

application programming interface, the craft interface, and SNMP.

Storage and change management—Configuration files, system images, and

microcode can be held and maintained in primary and secondary storage

systems, permitting local or remote upgrades.

Monitoring efficiency and flexibility—The router supports functions such

as alarm handling and packet counting on every port, without degrading

packet-forwarding performance.

The Routing Engine constructs and maintains one or more routing tables (see

Figure 25). From the routing tables, the Routing Engine derives a table of active

routes, called the forwarding table, which is then copied into the Packet Forwarding

Engine. The design of the ASICs allow the forwarding table in the Packet Forwarding

Engine to be updated without interrupting forwarding performance.

Figure 25: Control Packet Handling for Routing and Forwarding Table Updates

Packets

out

Packet Forwarding

Engines

Forwarding table

updates

Routing protocol

packets from network

Routing Engine

Routing protocol

process

1240

Routing Engine Architecture 55

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

56 Routing Engine Architecture

Part 2

Initial Installation

Preparing for Router Installation on page 59

Unpacking the Router on page 77

Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 81

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift on page 83

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration on page 111

Initial Installation 57

58 Initial Installation

Chapter 5

Preparing for Router Installation

This chapter describes how to prepare your site for installation of the M160 Internet

router. It discusses the following topics:

Rack Requirements on page 59

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 62

Routing Node Environmental Specifications on page 62

Fire Safety Requirements on page 63

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications on page 64

Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines on page 70

Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74

Site Preparation Checklist on page 75

Rack Requirements

The router must be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are acceptable, including

front-mount racks, 4-post (telco) racks, and center-mount racks. An example of a

center-mount rack appears in Figure 26.

The following sections describe rack requirements:

Rack Size and Strength on page 60

Spacing of Mounting Holes on page 61

Connection to Building Structure on page 62

Rack Requirements 59

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Rack Size and Strength

The router is designed for installation in a rack that complies with

either of the following standards:

A 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets,Racks,Panels,andAssociatedEquipment

(document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry

Association (http://www.eia.org).

A 600-mm rack as defined in the four-part Equipment Engineering (EE);

European telecommunications standard for equipment practice (document

numbers ETS 300 119-1 through 119-4) published by the European

Telecommunications Standards Institute (http://www.etsi.org).

The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with

this standard is usually wider than the router’s front support posts and

center-mounting brackets, which measure 19 in. (48.3 cm) from outer edge

toouteredge. Useapprovedwingdevicestonarrowtheopeningbetween

the rails as required.

The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis’s

external dimensions: 35 in. (89 cm) high, 29 in. (73.6 cm) deep, and 17.5 in.

(44.5 cm) wide. The outer edges of the front support posts and center-mounting

brackets extend the width to 19 in. (48.3 cm). The spacing of rails and adjacent

racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack that are specified

in Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 62.

NOTE: The router might not fit into an 800-mm-deep cabinet, even if you adjust the

front-to-back position of the front mounting rails inside the cabinet.

If you mount the router in a cabinet, be sure that ventilation is sufficient to

prevent overheating.

In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack because

the more even distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides

greater stability. If a front-mount rack is used, we recommend supporting

the back of the router with a shelf or other structure.

The chassis height of 35 in. (89 cm) is approximately 20 U. A Uis the

standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment

(document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry

Association. You can stack eight M160 routers in a rack that has at least

40 U (70 in. or 1.78 m) of usable vertical space.

The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured

router, up to about 370.5 lb (168 kg). If you stack eight routers in one rack,

it must be capable of supporting about 740 lb (336 kg).

60 Rack Requirements

Preparing for Router Installation

Figure 26: Typical Center-Mount Rack

Mounting rails

Floor bolts

1011

(2.13 m)

7 ft

19 in. (48.3 cm)

Spacing of Mounting Holes

Table 14 specifies the spacing between mounting holes in the chassis’s front support

posts and center-mounting brackets. The mounting holes in a front-mount rack’s

rails must align with the holes in the front support posts, and the mounting holes in a

center-mount rack’s rails must align with the holes in the center-mounting brackets.

Table 14: Spacing of Holes on Front Support Post and Center-Mounting Bracket

Router Mounting Rail Hole Spacing

Front support post 4 U (7 in. or 17.78 cm)

Center-mounting bracket 3U(5.25in. or13.33cm)

Rack Requirements 61

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Connection to Building Structure

Always secure the rack to the structure of the building. If your geographical

area is subject to earthquakes, bolt the rack to the floor. For maximum

stability, also secure the rack to ceiling brackets. For more information, see

“Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings” on page 240.

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance

When planning the installation site, you need to allow sufficient

clearance around the rack (see Figure 27):

For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis

must be unrestricted. Figure 20 depicts the airflow in the router.

For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, there must

be adequate space at the front and back of the router. Allow at least 24 in.

(61cm)bothinfrontoftherouterandbehindit.

Figure 27: Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements

Rear of chassis

Front of chassis

24 in. (61 cm) clearance

for maintenance

Center rack-mount ears

17.5 in.

(44.5 cm)

29 in.

(73.6 cm)

24 in. (61 cm) clearance

for maintenance

6 in. (15.2 cm) clearance

for airflow

6 in. (15.2 cm) clearance

for airflow

1169

19 in.

(48.3 cm)

Top down view

19 in.

(48.3 cm)

Routing Node Environmental Specifications

Table 15 specifies the environmental specifications required for normal

router operation. In addition, the site should be as dust-free as possible.

Dust can clog air intake vents, reducing cooling system efficiency. Check the

vents frequently, cleaning them as necessary. For more information, see

“Maintaining Hardware Components” on page 127.

62 Routing Node Environmental Specifications

Preparing for Router Installation

Table 15: Routing Node Environmental Specifications

Description Value

Altitude No performance degradation to 10,000 ft (3048 m)

Relative humidity Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5% to

90%, noncondensing

Temperature Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 32°F (0°C) to

104°F (40°C)

Non-operating storage temperature in shipping crate:

–40°F (–40°C) to 158°F (70°C)

Seismic Tested to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake

requirements

Maximum thermal output 9400 BTU/hour

NOTE: Install the router only in restricted areas, such as dedicated equipment

rooms and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and

110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.

For additional safety guidelines and requirements, see “Safety and Regulatory

Compliance Information” on page 221.

Fire Safety Requirements

In the event of a fire emergency involving routers and other network equipment,

the safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish procedures for

protecting people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and

properly provision fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.

In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the

event of a fire emergency. Juniper Networks products should be installed in

an environment suitable for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire

suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the

equipment, and that all local fire, safety, and electrical codes and ordinances

be observed when installing and operating your equipment.

Fire Suppression

In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power

off to the equipment at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses

noncorrosive fire retardants, to extinguish the fire. For more information about

fire extinguishers, see “Fire Suppression Equipment” on page 64.

Fire Safety Requirements 63

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Fire Suppression Equipment

Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon

dioxide (CO2) and Halotron™, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires.

Type C fire extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to

eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from

the environment for cooling, you should use this type of inert oxygen displacement

extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leave residues on equipment.

Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical

fire extinguishers) near Juniper Networks equipment. The primary ingredient in

these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate, which is very sticky and

difficult to clean. In addition, in minute amounts of moisture, monoammonium

phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals.

Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been

discharged is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The

equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged.

NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to

control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks router. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher

is used, the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.

We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment

in an environmentally responsible manner.

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

The router uses DC power. There are two load-sharing, pass-through power supplies

located at the bottom rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. The power supplies

connect to the midplane, which distributes power to router components according

to their individual voltage requirements. When the power supplies are installed

and operational, they automatically share the electrical load. If a power supply

stops functioning for any reason, the remaining power supplies instantly begin

providing all the power the router needs for normal functioning and can provide

full power indefinitely.

For site wiring and power system guidelines, requirements, and specifications, see

the following sections:

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 65

Router Power Requirements on page 65

Chassis Grounding on page 67

Power, Connection, and Cable Specifications on page 67

64 Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

Preparing for Router Installation

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines

When planning the electrical wiring at your site, consider the factors

discussed in the following sections.

Distance Limitations for Signaling

Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference. In addition, the potential

for damage from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended

distances, or if wires pass between buildings. The electromagnetic pulse (EMP)

caused by lightning can damage unshielded conductors and destroy electronic

devices. If your site has previously experienced such problems, you might want

to consult experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding.

Radio Frequency Interference

You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference (RFI) from

your site wiring by using twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding

conductors. If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality

twisted-pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable.

Electromagnetic Compatibility

If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility

(EMC), particularly from lightning or radio transmitters, you might want to

seek expert advice. Strong sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) can

destroy the signal drivers and receivers in the router and conduct power

surges over the lines into the equipment, resulting in an electrical hazard.

It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded

environment and to use electrical surge-suppression devices.

CAUTION: To comply with intrabuilding lightning/surge requirements, intrabuilding

wiring must be shielded, and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both

ends.

Router Power Requirements

Table 16 lists the power requirements for various hardware components

when the router is operating under typical voltage conditions. For PIC power

requirements, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications 65

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Table 16: Component Power Requirements

Component Power Requirement (Amps)

Base system (cooling system, power supplies, and craft

interface)

7-10 A/48 V

Hostmodule(RoutingEngineandMCS) 1.3A/48V

FPC 2.4A/48V

PCG 0.2A/48V

SFM 1.3A/48V

You can use the information in Table 16 and the M160 Internet Router PIC

Guide to calculate power consumption for various hardware configurations,

input current from a different source voltage, and thermal output, as shown

in the following examples. (For an added safety margin, the examples use

a generalized value for PICs of 0.625 A/48 V each.)

Power consumption for minimum configuration:

Base system + 1 FPC + 1 SFM + 1 host module + 2 PCGs + 4 PICs =

7 A + 2.4 A + 1.3 A + 1.3 A + 2(0.2 A) + 4(0.625 A) =

7 A + 2.4 A + 1.3 A + 1.3 A + 0.4 A + 2.5 A = 14.9 A @ 48 V = 715 W DC

Power consumption for maximum configuration:

Base system + 8 FPCs + 4 SFMs + 2 host modules + 2 PCGs + 32 PICs =

10 A + 8(2.4 A) + 4(1.3 A) + 2(1.3 A) + 2(0.2 A) + 32(0.625 A) =

10A + 19.2A + 5.2A + 2.6A + 0.4A + 20A=57.4A@48V=2755WDC

Input current from a DC source other than 48 V (based on maximum

configuration):

(54 VDC input) x (input current X) = (48 VDC input) x (input current Y)

54 x X = 48 x 57.4 A

X=48 x 57.4A/54=51.0A

System thermal output for maximally configured router:

105% of Watts DC/0.293 = BTU/hr

1.05 x 2755/0.293 = 9873 BTU/hr

NOTE: If you plan to operate a maximally configured router, we recommend that

you provision at least 70 A @ 48 VDC and use a facility circuit breaker rated for

70 A minimum. Doing so enables you to operate the router in any configuration

without upgrading the power infrastructure, and allows the router to function at

full capacity using one power supply.

If you plan to operate the router at less than the maximum configuration and do not

provision a 70 A circuit breaker, we recommend that you provision a circuit breaker

rated for at least 125% of the continuous current that the system draws at 48 V.

66 Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

Preparing for Router Installation

Chassis Grounding

To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to

ensure proper operation, the router must be adequately grounded before power

is connected. A pair of threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the right

rear of the chassis for connecting the router to earth ground.

CAUTION: Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach a

cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an

incorrectly attached lug can damage the router (for example, by causing a short

circuit).

To ground the router, connect a grounding cable to earth ground and then

attach it to the chassis grounding points. The grounding points are spaced at

0.625-in. (15.86-mm) centers. The accessory box shipped with the router

includes the cable lug that attaches to the grounding cable (see Figure 28) and

the UNC 1/4–20 screws (American) used to secure the grounding cable to the

grounding points. (The cable lug shown in Figure 28 is also used for the DC power

cables.) Thegroundingcablemustbeabletohandleupto82A.

Figure 28: Power and Grounding Cable Lug

Crimp area

All measurements in inches

0.28

2 holes

2.25

0.25 0.37

0.63

g002137

0.55

End view

0.08

Thegroundingcablemustbe8-AWG(8.4m

2) wire, minimum, or

as permitted by the local code.

Power, Connection, and Cable Specifications

To supply power to the router, connect power cables to a separate, dedicated power

source for each power supply and attach the cables to the terminal studs on the

circuit breaker box. Most sites distribute power through a main conduit that leads

to frame-mounted power distribution panels, one of which might be located at the

top of the rack that houses the router. A pair of cables (one input and one return)

connects each set of terminal studs to the power distribution panel.

CAUTION: There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding

used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding

for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on the circuit

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications 67

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

breaker box. You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.

The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.

Figure 29 shows a typical source cabling arrangement.

Figure 29: Typical Source Cabling to the Router

Chassis

grounding

points

Ground

window

Central

office ground

Plant

controls

Rectifiers

Battery plant

Batteries

1975

Central

office ground

Central office

primary & secondary

DC power distribution

WARNING: Power plant ground and chassis ground must be connected to the

same building ground.

Table 17 summarizes the specifications for the grounding and power cables, which

you supply. The accessory box shipped with the router includes the cable lugs that

attach to the terminal studs of the circuit breaker box (see Figure 28). (The cable

lug shown in Figure 28 is also used for the grounding the chassis.)

CAUTION: Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach a

cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an

incorrectly attached lug can damage the router (for example, by causing a short

circuit).

68 Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications

Preparing for Router Installation

Table 17: DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications

Cable Type Quantity and Specification

Maximum

Equal Length

Power Eight 4-AWG (16 mm2) wires, minimum, or as permitted

by the local code

None

Grounding One 8-AWG (8.4 mm2) wire, minimum, or as permitted

by the local code

None

WARNING: For field-wiring connections, use copper conductors only.

For other electrical safety information, see “Electrical Safety Guidelines and

Warnings” on page 227.

CAUTION: Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or

drape where people could trip on them.

Figure 30 shows how to attach the power cables. The power cables attach

to the 1/4–20 UNC terminal studs located on the circuit breaker box—

the input set of studs is labeled –48V andthereturnsetislabeledRTN(+).

Thenutsandlockingwashersusedtosecurethepowercablelugson

the terminal studs are preinstalled on the studs.

The tool for loosening or tightening the nuts on the terminal studs is a

7/16-in. hexagonal-head external drive socket wrench, or nut driver, with

a minimum of 30 lb-in. (3.5 Nm) tightening torque.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

Power Guidelines, Requirements, and Specifications 69

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 30: Power and Grounding Cable Connections

g001226

Terminal studs

Cable lug

Flat washer

To ground

Nut

Grounding

points

For information about the DC power supply, including electrical specifications and

a description of components, see “Power Supply” on page 36. For instructions

on connecting the DC power and grounding cables during initial installation, see

“Connecting Power to the Router” on page 117. For instructions on replacing a

DC power cable, see “Disconnecting and Connecting Power” on page 200.

Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines

The various PICs supported on the router accept different kinds of network cable,

including multimode and single-mode fiber-optic cable. For more information, see

the following sections:

Fiber Optic and Network Cable Specifications on page 71

Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable on page 71

Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable on page 71

Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable on page 72

Calculating Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable on page 73

Attenuating to Prevent Saturation at SONET/SDH PICs on page 74

70 Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines

Preparing for Router Installation

Fiber Optic and Network Cable Specifications

The router supports PICs that use various kinds of network cable, including

multimode and single-mode fiber-optic cable. For information about the type

ofcableusedbyeachPIC,seetheM160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable

Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally

(bounce off the walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically

use LEDs as light sources. LEDs are not coherent sources, however. They spray

varying wavelengths of light into the multimode fiber, which reflects the light at

different angles. Light rays travel in jagged lines through a multimode fiber, causing

signal dispersion. When light traveling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber

cladding, higher-order mode loss (HOL) results. Together these factors limit the

transmission distance of multimode fiber compared to single-mode fiber.

Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light can reflect internally

through one layer only. Interfaces with single-mode optics use lasers as

light sources. Lasers generate a single wavelength of light, which travels in

astraightlinethroughthesingle-modefiber. Comparedwithmultimode

fiber, single-mode fiber has higher bandwidth and can carry signals for

longer distances. It is consequently more expensive.

For information about the maximum transmission distance and supported

wavelength range for the types of single-mode and multimode fiber-optic cable

used by PICs on the M160 router, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

Exceeding the maximum transmission distances can result in significant

signal loss, which causes unreliable transmission.

The router uses optical lasers for SONET/SDH PIC single-mode interfaces.

TheseopticscomplywithIR-1ofBellcoreGR-253-COREIssue2,

December 1995 and ANSI TI.105.06.

Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable

Correct functioning of an optical data link depends on modulated light reaching

the receiver with enough power to be demodulated correctly. Attenuation is the

reduction in power of the light signal as it is transmitted. Attenuation is caused

by passive media components, such as cables, cable splices, and connectors.

While attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber than for other media, it

still occurs in both multimode and single-mode transmission. An efficient optical

data link must have enough light available to overcome attenuation.

Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines 71

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Dispersion is the spreading of the signal in time. The following two types

of dispersion can affect an optical data link:

Chromatic dispersion—The spreading of the signal in time resulting from

the different speeds of light rays.

Modal dispersion—The spreading of the signal in time resulting from the

different propagation modes in the fiber.

For multimode transmission, modal dispersion, rather than chromatic

dispersion or attenuation, usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length.

For single-mode transmission, modal dispersion is not a factor. However,

at higher bit rates and over longer distances, chromatic dispersion rather

than modal dispersion limits maximum link length.

An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum

power that the receiver requires to operate within its specifications. In addition,

the total dispersion must be less than the limits specified for the type of link in

Telcordia Technologies document GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and International

Telecommunications Union (ITU) document G.957.

When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, its effect can be considered

as a power penalty in the power budget. The optical power budget must allow

for the sum of component attenuation, power penalties (including those from

dispersion), and a safety margin for unexpected losses. For more information about

power budget, see “Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable” on page 72.

Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable

To ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation,

you need to calculate the link’s power budget, which is the maximum amount

of power it can transmit. When you calculate the power budget, you use a

worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even though all the parts of

an actual system do not operate at the worst-case levels. To calculate the

worst-case estimate of power budget (PB), you assume minimum transmitter

power (PT) and minimum receiver sensitivity (PR):

PB=P

T–P

The following hypothetical power budget equation uses values measured in

decibels (dB) and decibels referred to one milliwatt (dBm):

PB=P

T–P

PB=–15dBm–(–28dBm)

PB=13dB

72 Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines

Preparing for Router Installation

Calculating Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable

After calculating a link’s power budget (using the equation described in

“Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable” on page 72), you can

calculate the power margin (PM),whichrepresentstheamountofpower

available after subtracting attenuation or link loss (LL) from the power budget

(PB).Aworst-caseestimateofPMassumes maximum LL:

PM=P

B–LL

APMgreater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient

to operate the receiver.

Factors that can cause link loss include higher-order mode losses, modal and

chromatic dispersion, connectors, splices, and fiber attenuation. Table 18

lists an estimated amount of loss for the factors used in the following sample

calculations. For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused

by equipment and other factors, refer to vendor documentation.

Table 18: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss

Link-Loss Factor Estimated Link-Loss Value

Higher-order mode losses Single-mode—None

Multimode—0.5 dB

Modal and chromatic dispersion Single-mode—None

Multimode—None, if product of bandwidth and distance

is less than 500 MHz–km

Connector 0.5 dB

Splice 0.5 dB

Fiber attenuation Single-mode—0.5 dB/km

Multimode—1 dB/km

The following example uses the estimated values in Table 18 to calculate link loss

(LL)fora2km-longmultimodelinkwithapowerbudget(PB)of13dB:

Fiber attenuation for 2 km @ 1.0 dB/km= 2 dB

Loss for five connectors @ 0.5 dB per connector = 5(0.5 dB) = 2.5 dB

Loss for two splices @ 0.5 dB per splice =2(0.5 dB) = 1 dB

Higher-order loss = 0.5 dB

Clock recovery module = 1 dB

The power margin (PM) is calculated as follows:

Network Cable Specifications and Guidelines 73

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

PM=P

B–LL

PM=13dB–2km(1.0dB/km)–5(0.5dB)–2(0.5dB)–0.5dB[HOL]–1dB[CRM]

PM=13dB–2dB–2.5dB–1dB–0.5dB–1dB

PM=6dB

The following sample calculation for an 8 km-long single-mode link with

a power budget (PB) of 13 dB uses the estimated values from Table 18 to

calculate link loss (LL) as the sum of fiber attenuation (8 km @ 0.5 dB/km,

or 4 dB) and loss for seven connectors (0.5 dB per connector, or 3.5 dB).

The power margin (PM) is calculated as follows:

PM=P

B–LL

PM=13dB–8km(0.5dB/km)–7(0.5dB)

PM=13dB–4dB–3.5dB

PM=5.5dB

In both examples, the calculated power margin is greater than zero,

indicating that the link has sufficient power for transmission and does

not exceed the maximum receiver input power.

Attenuating to Prevent Saturation at SONET/SDH PICs

SONET/SDH interfaces in the different reach classes—short reach (SR), intermediate

reach (IR), and long reach (LR)—generate different output power levels and

tolerate different input power levels. Interfaces that have a longer reach can

transmit enough power to saturate the receivers on PICs that have a shorter reach.

Specifically, LR interfaces can saturate IR PICs, and both IR and LR interfaces can

saturate SR PICs. Interfaces in the same reach class can also saturate one another.

To prevent saturation, you might need to attenuate power at the PIC receiver,

particularly if you know that it has a shorter reach than the interface that is

sending the signal. Determine the amount of attenuation needed by measuring

the power level at each receiver. Attenuate the power to bring it within the

allowable range; for short lengths of fiber, with fiber and connector loss close

tozero,anattenuatorof5to10dBshouldbesufficient.

Forspecificationsofminimumandmaximuminputlevel(receiver

sensitivity and receiver saturation) and minimum and maximum output

level (average launch power) for the SONET/SDH PICs supported on the

M160 router, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications

For management and service operations, you connect the Routing Engine to

an external console or management network through ports on the Connector

74 Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications

Preparing for Router Installation

Interface Panel (CIP). You can also connect the router to external alarm-reporting

devices through the alarm relay contacts on the CIP. (For more information,

see Connector Interface Panel (CIP) on page 32.)

Table 19 lists the specifications for the cables that connect to management

ports and the wires that connect to the alarm relay contacts.

Table 19: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine Management and Alarm Interfaces

Port

Cable

Specification

Cable/Wire

Supplied

Maximum

Length

Router

Receptacle

Routing Engine

console or

auxiliary

interface

RS-232 (EIA-232)

serial cable

One 6-ft (1.83-m)

length with

DB-9/DB-9

connectors

6 ft (1.83 m) DB-9 male

Routing Engine

Ethernet

interface

Category 5 cable or

equivalent suitable

for 100BaseT

operation

One 15-ft (4.57-m)

length with

RJ-45/RJ-45

connectors

328 ft (100 m) RJ-45

autosensing

Alarm relay

contacts

Wire with gauge

between 24-AWG

and 12-AWG (0.20

and 3.33 mm2)

No None —

Site Preparation Checklist

The checklist in Table 20 summarizes the tasks you need to perform

when preparing a site for router installation.

Table 20: Site Preparation Checklist

Item or Task Performed By Date Notes

Verify that environmental factors such

as temperature and humidity do not

exceed router tolerances (see Routing Node

Environmental Specifications on page 62).

Measure distance between external power

sources and router installation site.

Select the type of rack or cabinet.

Plan rack or cabinet location, including

required space clearances.

If a rack is used, secure rack to floor and

building structure.

Acquire cables and connectors.

Site Preparation Checklist 75

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Item or Task Performed By Date Notes

Locate sites for connection of system

grounding.

Calculate power budget and power margin.

76 Site Preparation Checklist

Chapter 6

Unpacking the Router

This chapter explains how to unpack the router and verify the parts received.

Before beginning, prepare the installation site as described in “Preparing for

Router Installation” on page 59 and review the safety information in “Safety and

Regulatory Compliance Information” on page 221, especially “General Safety

Guidelines and Warnings” on page 224 and “Installation Safety Guidelines and

Warnings” on page 239. This chapter discusses the following topics:

Tools and Parts Required on page 77

Unpacking the Router on page 77

Tools and Parts Required

To unpack the router and prepare for installation, you need the following tools:

Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

1/2-in. or 13-mm open-end or socket wrench to remove bracket bolts from

the shipping pallet

Blank panels to cover any slots not occupied by a component

Unpacking the Router

The router is shipped in a wooden crate and bolted to the pallet that

forms the bottom of the crate. The crate also contains an accessory

box, the handle used during manual router installation, and the M160

Internet Router Installation Quick Start poster.

NOTE: The router is maximally protected inside the shipping crate. Do not unpack

it until you are ready to begin installation.

To unpack the router, perform these steps:

1. Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as

possible, but where you have enough room to remove the system components.

Unpacking the Router 77

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

While the chassis is bolted to the pallet, you can use a forklift or pallet jack

to move it.

2. Position the crate so that the arrows are pointing up.

3. Twist open the locking tabs that secure the crate to the pallet and the front

panel to the side panels.

4. Remove the front panel from the crate, then lift the top and sides off the pallet

asaunit. SeeFigure31.

5. Remove the plastic cover, then the foam and Quick Start that are sitting on top

of the chassis. The installation handle and accessory box are embedded in

cutouts in the foam.

6. Open the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on

the label attached to the box.

7. Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with

the router. A generic parts inventory appears in Table 21.

8. Use a 1/2-in. open-end or socket wrench to loosen and remove the bolts on the

brackets that attach the chassis to the pallet. If a 1/2-in. tool is not available,

use pliers or an adjustable wrench rather than a fixed-size metric wrench.

9. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws that secure the brackets to the

sides of the chassis, and remove the brackets. Store the brackets, screws,

and bolts inside the accessory box.

10. Save the shipping crate, packing materials, and pallet in case you later need

to move or ship the router.

78 Unpacking the Router

Unpacking the Router

Figure 31: Unpacking the Router

M160 chassis

Shipping crate

cover

Shipping crate

base

1168

Table 21: Generic Inventory of Router Components Installed in Chassis

Component Quantity

Front impeller assembly with craft interface 1

FPC with one or more PICs installed Up to 8

PIC Up to 4 per FPC

CIP 1

Front fan tray with 4 fans and cable management system 1

Midplane 1

Rearupperimpellerassembly 1

SFM 4

MCS 1 or 2

Routing Engine 1 or 2

PCG 2

Rear lower impeller assembly 1

Circuit breaker box 1

Power supply 2

Center-mounting brackets 2

Blank panels for slots without components Varies depending on router configuration

Unpacking the Router 79

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

80 Unpacking the Router

Chapter 7

Installing the Router Using a Mechanical

Lift

Because the router weighs between 190 lb (86 kg) and about 370.5 lb (168 kg)

depending on configuration, using a mechanical lift to install it is recommended.

This chapter provides instructions. If you do not use a lift, see “Installing the Router

without a Mechanical Lift” on page 83. This chapter has the following sections:

Tools and Parts Required on page 81

Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift on page 81

Tools and Parts Required

To install the chassis into a rack using a mechanical lift, you need

the following tools and parts:

Mechanical lift

5/32-in. Allen (hexagonal) wrench for tightening the mounting screws provided

in the accessory box; do not substitute a metric-size wrench

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2, if removing center-mounting

brackets or installing rear support shelf

Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift

Using a mechanical lift to maneuver the router into the rack is recommended

becauseoftherouter’ssizeandweight.Theliftmustbeabletoaccommodatethe

router’s weight—between 190 lb (86 kg) and about 370.5 lb (168 kg) depending on

configuration—and must fit between the support posts of the rack.

NOTE: If you are installing multiple routers in a rack, install the lowest one first

and proceed upward.

Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift 81

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

First, perform the following prerequisite procedures:

Verify that the router site meets the requirements described in “Preparing

for Router Installation” on page 59.

Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for

airflow and maintenance, and secure it to the building structure. For details,

see Rack Requirements on page 59.

Read the information in “Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings” on page

239, with particular attention to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 239.

Remove the router from the shipping carton, as described in “Unpacking the

Router” on page 77.

Then, perform the following procedures to install the router:

1. If you are front-mounting the router, remove the center-mounting ear from

each side of the chassis. (Also, we recommend installing a shelf or other

support for the rear of the chassis.)

2. Load the router onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the lift platform.

3. Use the lift to position the router at the correct height in the rack.

4. Align the bottom hole in both front support posts or center-mounting brackets

with a hole in each rack rail, making sure the chassis is level.

5. Install one of the mounting screws provided into each of the two aligned holes.

Use a 5/32-in. Allen wrench to tighten the screws.

6. Moving up each post or ear, install a screw in every mounting hole.

7. Verify that all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the

mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level.

8. Move the lift away from the rack.

9. To continue the installation, proceed to “Connecting the Router and Performing

Initial Configuration” on page 111.

82 Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift

Chapter 8

Installing the Router without a

Mechanical Lift

You can install the router into a rack either with or without the help of a mechanical

lift. Because the router weighs between 190 lb (86 kg) and about 370.5 lb

(168 kg) depending on configuration, using a mechanical lift is recommended; for

instructions, see “Installing the Router Using a Mechanical Lift” on page 81.

If you do not use a mechanical lift, you must remove components from the chassis

to reduce its weight before lifting it into the rack. The reduced chassis weight is

approximately 115 lb (52 kg), so installing it safely still requires three people to lift

and another person to insert the mounting screws.

Table 22 lists the weight of the chassis and major components.

Table 22: Router Component Weights

Component

Approximate

Weight (lb)

Approximate

Weight (kg)

Air filter 20.9

Cable management system 10.5

Chassis (with midplane, CIP, and circuit

breaker box or panel)

11 3 . 5 51 . 5

DC power supply 13 5.9

Fan tray 13 5.9

FPCwith4installedPICs 15 6.8

Front impeller assembly with craft interface 14.5 6.6

MCS 2.5 1.1

PCG 0.75 0.34

Rear lower impeller assembly 52.3

Rearupperimpellerassembly 41.8

Routing Engine 1.5 0.7

SFM 5 2.3

Installing the Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift 83

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Before installing the chassis, perform the following prerequisite procedures:

Verify that the router site meets the requirements described in “Preparing

for Router Installation” on page 59.

Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for

airflow and maintenance, and secure it to the building structure. For details,

see Rack Requirements on page 59.

Read the information in “Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings” on page

239, with particular attention to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 239.

Remove the router from the shipping carton, as described in “Unpacking the

Router” on page 77.

Then install the router by performing the procedures in the following sections:

Tools and Parts Required on page 84

Removing Components from the Chassis on page 84

Installing the Chassis into the Rack on page 97

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis on page 99

Tools and Parts Required

To install the chassis without using a mechanical lift, you need

the following tools and parts:

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2

Flat-blade screwdriver, approximately 1/4 in. (6 mm), for removing craft

interface

5/32-in. Allen (hexagonal) wrench for tightening the mounting screws provided

in the accessory box; do not substitute a metric-size wrench

Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats, one for each electronic component

removed

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap

Removing Components from the Chassis

To make the router light enough to install without a mechanical lift, you must

remove most of the components.

84 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

WARNING: The procedures in this section apply only to initial installation and

assume that you have not yet connected power to the router. If power is connected,

completely disconnect it before continuing. See “Disconnecting Power from the

Router” on page 200.

If you are installing or replacing components in an operational router, see

“Replacing Hardware Components” on page 139.

Do not stack components on top of one another after removing them from the

chassis. Place each one individually on a flat, stable surface, either on an antistatic

matorinanelectrostaticbag.

Set the removed components far enough away from the installation site that they

will not be in the way as you lift the chassis into the rack.

Perform the procedures described in the following sections to remove components

from the chassis, first from the rear and then from the front:

Removing the Power Supplies on page 86

Removing the Rear Component Cover on page 86

RemovingtheSFMsonpage87

Removing the MCSs on page 88

Removing the PCGs on page 89

Removing the Routing Engines on page 90

Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 91

Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 92

Removing the Fan Tray on page 93

Removing the FPCs on page 94

Removing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 96

NOTE: Do not remove the circuit breaker box or the Connector Interface Panel (CIP).

This chapter does not include instructions for removing these components.

Removing Components from the Chassis 85

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Removing the Power Supplies

The router has two power supplies located at the bottom rear of the chassis, as

shown in Figure 2. A power supply weighs approximately 13 lb (5.9 kg).

To remove the power supplies, follow this procedure (see Figure 32):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that the power switch for each power supply is in the OFF (O)position.

The switches are on the circuit breaker box.

3. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate, using

a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

4. Grasp the handle or handles on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly

to slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis.

5. Place one hand under the power supply to support it, then slide it completely

outofthechassis.

6. Repeat the procedure to remove the second power supply.

Figure 32: Removing a Power Supply

g001918

Removing the Rear Component Cover

The rear component cover protects the SFMs, Routing Engines, MCSs, and

PCGs, as shown in Figure 2. To remove it, follow this procedure:

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

86 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the component cover, using a

Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

3. Pull the cover straight off the chassis.

CAUTION: To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding, do

not operate the router without the rear component cover in place.

Removing the SFMs

The router can have an SFM in each of the slots labeled SFM 0 through

SFM 3 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. Each SFM

weighs approximately 5 lb (2.3 kg).

To remove an SFM, follow this procedure (see Figure 33):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Loosen the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab (shown in Figure 8), using

a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

4. Pull the end of each ejector handle outward until it is nearly perpendicular to

the SFM faceplate.

5. Grasp the ejector handles and pull firmly to slide the SFM about halfway

outofthechassis.

6. Place one hand under the SFM to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

CAUTION: When an SFM is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles.

They cannot support its weight.

Do not stack SFMs on top of or under other components. Place each one individually

in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

If additional SFMs are installed, repeat the procedure to remove them.

Removing Components from the Chassis 87

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 33: Removing an SFM

1931

Locking tab

Ejector handle

Removing the MCSs

The router can have an MCS in each of the slots labeled MCS 0 and MCS 1 at the rear

of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. Each MCS weighs approximately 2.5 lb (1 kg).

To remove the MCSs, follow this procedure (see Figure 34):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Push the end of each extractor clip (located at each end of the MCS) outward.

4. Grasp the extractor clips and slide the MCS about halfway out of the chassis.

5. Place one hand under the MCS to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

If a second MCS is installed, repeat the procedure to remove it.

88 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

Figure 34: Removing an MCS

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

1928

Extractor clip

Removing the PCGs

The router has two PCGs installed in the slots labeled PCG 0 and PCG 1 at the rear of

the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. Each PCG weighs approximately 1 lb (0.5 kg).

To remove the PCGs, follow this procedure (see Figure 35):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Loosen the thumbscrew at the lower right corner of the PCG faceplate, using

a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

4. Grasp the thumbscrew and slide the PCG about halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: Be careful to slide the PCG straight out of the chassis to avoid bending

any of the pins on the underside of the board.

5. Place one hand under the PCG to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

6. Repeat the procedure to remove the second PCG.

Removing Components from the Chassis 89

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 35: Removing a PCG

1929

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

MCS 1

PCG 1

Removing the Routing Engines

The router can have a Routing Engine in each of the slots labeled RE 0

and RE 1 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. Each Routing

Engine weighs approximately 1.5 lb (0.7 kg).

To remove a Routing Engine, follow this procedure (see Figure 36):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Usingyourthumbs,pushandholdtheredtaboneachextractorcliptowardthe

outer edge of the unit. Push the ends of the extractor clips outward to unseat

theRoutingEnginefromthechassis.

4. Grasp the extractor clips and slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: Slide the Routing Engine straight out of the chassis. Damage can result if

it gets lodged because of uneven movement.

5. Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it, slide it completely out

of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

90 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

If a second Routing Engine is installed, repeat the procedure to remove it.

Figure 36: Removing a Routing Engine

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

PCG 1

1950

Extractor

clip

Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

The rear upper impeller assembly is located at the top of the chassis rear, as

shown in Figure 2. The assembly weighs approximately 4 lb (1.8 kg).

To remove the rear upper impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 37

and Figure 38, which show the two types of impeller that can be installed):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover, using a Phillips

screwdriver if necessary.

3. Grasp the screws at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the

assembly out of the chassis.

Removing Components from the Chassis 91

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 37: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1211

Figure 38: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1933

Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

The rear lower impeller assembly is located to the left of the circuit

breaker box on the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. The

assembly weighs approximately 5 lb (2.3 kg).

To remove the rear lower impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 39):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover, using a Phillips

screwdriver if necessary.

92 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

3. Grasp the screws at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the

assembly out of the chassis.

Figure 39: Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

1914

Removing the Fan Tray

The fan tray is located behind the cable management system on the front

of the chassis, just above the air filter, as shown in Figure 1. The fan tray

contains four fans and weighs approximately 13 lb (5.9 kg).

To remove the fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 40):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the fan tray, using a Phillips screwdriver

if necessary.

3. Graspthesidesofthefantrayandpullfirmlytoslideitoutofthechassis.

Removing Components from the Chassis 93

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 40: Removing the Fan Tray

1936

Removing the FPCs

The router can have up to eight FPCs mounted vertically in the FPC card

cage on the front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 1. An FPC that

houses four PICs weighs about 15 lb (6.8 kg).

NOTE: To help you work systematically, the following procedure directs you to

remove FPCs starting at the left side of the card cage and working toward the right.

You can remove FPCs in any order, however. As you remove each FPC, label it with

its slot number and record the relevant information in the checklist in Table 23.

Table 23: FPC Removal Checklist

Slot Media Types Date Removed Date Reinstalled

To remove the FPCs, follow this procedure (see Figure 41):

94 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Locate the FPC or blank panel located in the leftmost slot of the card cage

on the front of the chassis. It is directly below the offline button on the craft

interface that is labeled FPC0.

4. If the slot is covered by a blank panel, you can leave it in place. If the slot

contains an FPC, perform the following steps:

a. LoosenthethumbscrewateachendoftheFPC,usingaPhillipsscrewdriver

if necessary.

b. Pull the ends of the ejector levers, which are adjacent to the thumbscrews,

away from the face of the FPC until they are nearly perpendicular to it.

c. Grasp the top and bottom flanges of the card carrier and slide the FPC

about halfway out of the card cage.

d. Place one hand around the front of the FPC (the PIC housing) and the other

hand under it to support it. Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis,

and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

CAUTION: The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to

accept the full weight—up to 29 lb (13.2 kg)—as you slide the FPC out of the chassis.

When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector levers, bus bars,

or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.

Do not stack FPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually

in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

5. Repeat Step 4 for each FPC card carrier or blank cover, proceeding from

left to right.

Removing Components from the Chassis 95

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 41: Removing an FPC

1191

Offline button

Ejector levers

Removing the Front Impeller Assembly

The front impeller assembly, which includes the craft interface, is located

at the front of the chassis above the FPC card cage, as shown in Figure 1.

The assembly weighs approximately 14.5 lb (6.6 kg).

To remove the front impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 42):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the captive screw at each corner of the

craft interface.

96 Removing Components from the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

4. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the gap around the craft interface and

gently pry the impeller assembly forward until you can grasp the sides of the

assembly and slide it halfway out of the chassis.

5. Place one hand under the assembly to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Figure 42: Removing the Front Impeller Assembly

1215

Captive screw

Installing the Chassis into the Rack

After you have removed components as described in Removing

Components from the Chassis on page 84, the chassis is light enough

for a team of installers to lift into the rack.

CAUTION: The reduced weight of the chassis is approximately 115 lb (52 kg).

Installing it into the rack still requires three people to lift and an additional person to

secure the mounting screws.

If you are installing multiple routers in a rack, install the lowest one first and

proceed upward.

Perform the following procedures (see Figure 44):

1. If you are front-mounting the router, remove the center-mounting ear from

each side of the chassis. (Also, we recommend installing a shelf or other

support for the rear of the chassis.)

2. Attach the lifting handle to the rear of the chassis, screwing the thumbscrews

at its corners into the holes located next to the SFM slots on the chassis (see

Figure 43). If you are installing the chassis in a lower rack space, use the set

of holes adjacent to the slots labeled SFM 0 and SFM 1. If you are installing

Installing the Chassis into the Rack 97

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

the chassis in an upper rack space, use the set of holes adjacent to the slots

labeled SFM 2 and SFM 3.

Figure 43: Attaching the Lifting Handle

1935

SFM 1

MCS 0

3. Prepare to lift the router:

One person stands behind the chassis and grasps the lifting handle.

Two people stand on either side of the chassis. Each grasps the bar at the

bottom of the FPC card cage with one hand and places the other hand

under the chassis near the rear.

4. Lift the chassis and position it in the rack.

WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not

your back. Avoid twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be

sure that your footing is solid.

5. Align the bottom hole in both front support posts or center-mounting brackets

with a hole in each rack rail, making sure the chassis is level.

6. Install one of the mounting screws provided into each of the two aligned holes.

Use a 5/32-in. Allen wrench to tighten the screws.

7. Moving up each post or ear, install a screw in every mounting hole.

8. Verify that all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the

mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level.

9. Loosenthethumbscrewsontheliftinghandleandremoveitfromthechassis.

98 Installing the Chassis into the Rack

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

10. Proceed to the instructions in Reinstalling Components into the Chassis on

page 99.

Figure 44: Installing the Chassis in a Rack

1172

Center-mounting rack

Chassis

rack-mounting ear

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

After you have mounted the chassis in the rack as described in Installing the Chassis

into the Rack on page 97, reinstall the router components into the chassis.

WARNING: The procedures in this section apply only to initial installation and

assume that you have not yet connected power to the router. If power is connected,

completely disconnect it before continuing. See “Disconnecting Power from the

Router” on page 200.

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 99

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

If you are installing or replacing components in an operational router, see

“Replacing Hardware Components” on page 139.

Perform the procedures described in the following sections to reinstall components

into the chassis, first into the front and then into the rear:

Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly on page 100

Reinstalling the FPCs on page 101

Reinstalling the Fan Tray on page 102

Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 103

Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 104

Reinstalling the Routing Engines on page 105

Reinstalling the PCGs on page 106

Reinstalling the MCSs on page 107

Reinstalling the SFMs on page 108

Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover on page 109

Reinstalling the Power Supplies on page 109

Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly

The front impeller assembly, which includes the craft interface, is located

at the top of the chassis front, as shown in Figure 1. To reinstall it,

follow this procedure (see Figure 45):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Grasp the sides of the impeller assembly and align the rear of the assembly

with the guides inside the chassis.

3. Slide the impeller assembly all the way into the chassis.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the captive screw at each corner of the

craft interface.

100 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

Figure 45: Reinstalling the Front Impeller Assembly

1216

Captive screw

Reinstalling the FPCs

TheFPCsinstallintothecardcageatthefrontofthechassis,asshowninFigure1.

NOTE: To help you work systematically, the following procedure directs you to

reinstallFPCsstartingattheleftsideofthecardcageandworkingtowardtheright.

You can install FPCs in any order, however.

Be sure there is a blank panel over every empty slot. The blank panels must be in

place during router operation to guarantee adequate circulation of cooling air.

To reinstall the FPCs, follow this procedure (see Figure 46):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Locate the leftmost slot in the FPC card cage on the front of the chassis. It is

directly below the offline button on the craft interface that is labeled FPC0.

Locate the FPC that you labeled FPC0 during removal.

3. Verify that the ends of the ejector levers, which are located at each end of the

FPC, are pushed outward, nearly perpendicular to the face of the FPC.

4. GraspthefrontoftheFPCwithonehandandplacetheotherhandunder

the FPC to support it.

CAUTION: WhentheFPCisoutofthechassis,donotholditbytheejectorlevers,

bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 101

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

5. Align the rear bottom corners of the FPC with the guides at the bottom of the

FPC slot. Slide the FPC into the card cage until it contacts the midplane.

6. Push the ends of the ejector levers inward until they are nearly flush with

the face of the FPC.

7. Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC to seat the FPC securely

in the chassis.

8. Repeat the procedure for each FPC, proceeding from left to right through the

slots with offline buttons labeled FPC1 through FPC7 on the craft interface.

Figure 46: Reinstalling an FPC

1193

Ejector

levers

Reinstalling the Fan Tray

The fan tray, which includes the cable management system, is located on

thefrontofthechassis,justabovetheairfilter,asshowninFigure1. To

reinstall it, follow this procedure (see Figure 47):

102 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Grasp the sides of the fan tray and align the rear of the tray with the guides

inside the chassis.

3. Slidethefantrayallthewayintothechassis.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the cable management system.

Figure 47: Reinstalling the Fan Tray

1937

Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

The rear lower impeller assembly is located to the left of the circuit

breaker box on the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. To reinstall

it, follow this procedure (see Figure 48):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Orient the impeller so that the label is on the top. Align the rails on the upper

edges of the impeller assembly with the guides inside the chassis.

3. Pushtheimpellerassemblyupandtotherighttostartitintothechassis,

then slide it all the way in.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover.

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 103

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 48: Reinstalling the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

1915

Rails

Guides

Label

Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

The rear upper impeller assembly is installed at the top of the chassis rear, as

shown in Figure 2. To reinstall the assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 49

and Figure 50, which show the two types of impeller that can be installed):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Slide the assembly all the way into the chassis.

3. Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover.

104 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

Figure 49: Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1212

Figure 50: Reinstalling the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1934

Reinstalling the Routing Engines

The router can have a Routing Engine in each of the slots labeled RE 0 and

RE 1 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3.

NOTE: If two Routing Engines are installed, they must both be the same version.

To reinstall a Routing Engine, follow this procedure (see Figure 51):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 105

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

2. Verify that the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine is flipped

toward the outer edge of the unit. If necessary, use your thumbs to push and

hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer edge, then push the

ends of the extractor clips outward.

3. Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it and grasp one of the

extractor clips on the faceplate with the other hand.

4. Align the rear of the Routing Engine with the guide rails inside the chassis

and slide it in completely.

CAUTION: Align the Routing Engine carefully with the guide rails and push it in

evenly. Damage can result if it gets lodged in the rails because of uneven movement.

5. Press the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine inward to seat the

unit firmly in the chassis.

If there is a second Routing Engine, repeat the procedure to reinstall it.

Figure 51: Reinstalling a Routing Engine

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

PCG 1

1951

Extractor

clip

Reinstalling the PCGs

The router has two PCGs installed in the slots labeled PCG 0 and PCG 1

at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. To reinstall the PCGs,

follow this procedure (see Figure 52):

106 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Place one hand under the PCG to support it and grasp the thumbscrew on

the faceplate with the other hand.

3. AligntherearofthePCGwiththeguidesinsidethechassisandslideit

in completely.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew on the faceplate to seat the PCG firmly in the chassis.

5. Repeat the procedure to reinstall the second PCG.

Figure 52: Reinstalling a PCG

1930

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

MCS 1

PCG 1

Reinstalling the MCSs

The router can have an MCS in each of the slots labeled MCS 0 and

MCS 1 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. To reinstall an

MCS, follow this procedure (see Figure 53):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Place one hand under the MCS to support it and grasp one of the extractor

clips on the faceplate with the other hand.

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 107

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

3. AligntherearoftheMCSwiththeguidesinsidethechassisandslideit

in completely.

4. Press the extractor clip at each end of the MCS inward.

If there is a second MCS, repeat the procedure to reinstall it.

Figure 53: Reinstalling an MCS

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MSC 0

RE 0

1927

Extractor clip

Reinstalling the SFMs

The router can have an SFM in each of the slots labeled SFM 0 through

SFM 3 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. To reinstall an

SFM, follow this procedure (see Figure 54):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that the ends of the ejector handles are pulled outward to a position

nearly perpendicular to the faceplate of the SFM.

3. Place one hand under the SFM to support it and grasp one of the ejector

handles at the front with the other hand.

4. Align the rear of the SFM with the guides inside the chassis and slide it

in completely.

5. Press the ejector handle at each end of the SFM inward.

6. Tighten the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab (shown in Figure 8) to

seat the SFM firmly in the chassis.

108 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift

If there are additional SFMs, repeat the procedure to reinstall them.

Figure 54: Reinstalling an SFM

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

1932

Ejector handle

Locking tab

Reinstalling the Rear Component Cover

The rear component cover protects the Routing Engines, PCGs, MCSs, and SFMs, as

shown in Figure 2. To reinstall the rear component cover, follow this procedure:

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Hold the component cover up to the rear of the chassis and align the flanges at

the top and bottom with the top and bottom of the opening in the chassis.

3. Push the cover into place.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the cover.

CAUTION: To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding, do

not operate the router without the rear component cover in place.

Reinstalling the Power Supplies

The two power supplies are located at the bottom rear of the chassis, as shown in

Figure 2. To reinstall the power supplies, follow this procedure (see Figure 55):

Reinstalling Components into the Chassis 109

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that the power switch for each power supply is in the OFF (O)position.

The switches are on the circuit breaker box.

3. Place one hand under the power supply and grasp a handle on the faceplate

with the other hand. Slide the power supply into the chassis until it contacts

the midplane.

4. Starting with the bottom screws, tighten (but do not overtighten) the

thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate.

5. Repeat the procedure to reinstall the second power supply.

6. To continue the installation, proceed to “Connecting the Router and Performing

Initial Configuration” on page 111.

Figure 55: Reinstalling a Power Supply

g001919

110 Reinstalling Components into the Chassis

Chapter 9

Connecting the Router and Performing

Initial Configuration

After installing the router into the rack as described in “Installing the Router Using a

Mechanical Lift” on page 81 or “Installing the Router without a Mechanical Lift” on

page 83, complete the installation by connecting management and alarm devices,

PICs, and power cables. This chapter has the following sections:

Tools and Parts Required on page 111

Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices on page 112

Connecting PIC Cables on page 115

Providing Power to the Router on page 117

Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software on page 121

Tools and Parts Required

To connect the router to management devices and PICs and to power on

the router, you need the following tools and parts:

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2

2.5 mm flat-blade (-) screwdriver

7/16-in. hexagonal-head external drive socket wrench, or nut driver, with a

minimum of 30 lb-in. (3.5 Nm) tightening torque, for tightening nuts to

terminal studs on the circuit breaker box

Tools and Parts Required 111

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

Wire cutters

Pliers

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap

Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices

After you have installed the router into the rack, attach one or more external

devices to the ports on the CIP that connect to the Routing Engines for management

and service operations (see Figure 56). For specifications for the cable accepted

by the Routing Engine management ports, see Routing Engine Interface Cable

and Wire Specifications on page 74.

112 Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration

Figure 56: Routing Engine Management Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

AUXILIARY

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

BITS A

BITS B

LINK

RED ALARM

YELLOW

ALARM

LINK

1204

Alarm relay

contacts

BITS

input ports

Routing

Engine ports

To connect external devices to the Routing Engine management ports, perform

the procedures described in the following sections:

Connecting to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 114

Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device on page 114

Connecting to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 115

Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices 113

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Connecting to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management, connect

an Ethernet cable with RJ-45/RJ-45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the CIP. One

such cable is provided with the router. For cable specifications, see Routing Engine

Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74. Follow this procedure:

1. Turn off the power to the management device.

2. Plug one end of the Ethernet cable (Figure 57 shows the connector) into the

appropriate ETHERNET port on the CIP. Figure 56 shows the external device

ports on the CIP. The ports labeled HOST 0 connect to the Routing Engine in the

upper Routing Engine slot (RE 0), and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the

Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot (RE 1).

3. Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.

Figure 57: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector

g001063

Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device

To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect

it to the appropriate CONSOLE portontheCIP.Tousealaptop,modem,orother

auxiliary device, connect it to the appropriate AUXILIARY port on the CIP. Both

ports accept an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable with DB-9/DB-9 connectors. One

such cable is provided with the router. If you want to connect a device to both

ports, you must supply another cable. For cable specifications, see Routing

Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74.

To connect a management console or auxiliary device, follow this procedure:

1. Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.

2. Plug the female end (shown in Figure 58) of the provided serial cable into the

appropriate CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port. Figure 56 shows the external device

ports on the CIP. The ports labeled HOST 0 connect to the Routing Engine in the

upper Routing Engine slot (RE 0), and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the

Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot (RE 1).

3. Using a 2.5 mm flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the screws on the connector.

4. Attach the other end of the cable to the console or auxiliary device.

114 Connecting the Router to Management and Alarm Devices

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration

Figure 58: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector

1027

Connecting to an External Alarm-Reporting Device

To connect the router to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires

to the RED ALARM and YELLOW ALARM relay contacts on the CIP. A system

condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface

also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact.

The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied

with the router. They accept wire of any gauge between 24-AWG and

12-AWG (0.20 and 3.33 mm2), which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire

appropriate for the external device you are connecting.

To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact, follow

this procedure (see Figure 56):

1. Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 24-AWG and 12-AWG

(0.20 and 3.33 mm2).

2. While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact, use a 2.5 mm

flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the small screws on its side. Insert wires into

the slots in the front of the block. Tighten the screws to secure the wire.

3. Orient the terminal block according to the labels to the left of the appropriate

relay contact (NC means “normally closed,” Cmeans “common,” and NO

means “normally open”).

4. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact and use a 2.5 mm flat-blade

screwdriver to tighten the screws on the face of the block.

5. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.

If attaching a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat the procedure.

Connecting PIC Cables

Now connect PICs to the network by plugging in network cable. To connect cable to

the PICs, follow this procedure (see Figure 59, which shows a fiber-optic PIC):

1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIC. For cable

specifications, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

2. If the PIC cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug, remove

the plug.

Connecting PIC Cables 115

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIC faceplate.

4. Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from

dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not

supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the

way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners

on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow

fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

116 Connecting PIC Cables

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration

Figure 59: Attaching Cable to a PIC

1239

Providing Power to the Router

Connect the router to external power sources and power it on by performing the

following procedures:

Connecting Power to the Router on page 117

Powering On the Router on page 119

Connecting Power to the Router

Connect power to the router by attaching a grounding cable to the chassis

grounding points and attaching power cables from external power sources

to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box. Power and grounding

cables are not supplied with the router. For cable specifications, see “Power,

Connection, and Cable Specifications” on page 67.

NOTE: The router must be connected to at least two separate external power

sources.

CAUTION: There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding

used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding

for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on the circuit

breaker box. You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.

The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.

To connect power to the router, follow this procedure (see Figure 60):

Providing Power to the Router 117

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

1. Verify that there is no power flowing from either external power source, so that

the voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V. Ensure that there is no

chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure.

2. For each power supply, verify that the power switch on the circuit breaker box

is in the OFF (O) position.

3. Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground.

4. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with

the router to the grounding cable.

5. Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the bottom rear of

the chassis. The grounding points are sized for 1/4-20 UNC screws.

6. Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points, first with the washers,

then with the screws.

CAUTION: Do not substitute metric screws such as M6 for the 1/4-20 UNC screws

that screw into the grounding points; screws other than 1/4-20 UNC screws can

strip the threading in the grounding points.

7. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws securing the

protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box. Remove

the cover.

8. Install one flat washer and one nut (in that order) on each power terminal stud:

If no washers and nuts are already installed, they should be in the

accessory box.

If two pairs of nuts and washers are installed on the studs, use a 7/16-in.

nut driver or wrench to loosen the outer nut on each stud. Remove the

outer nuts and washers, leaving the inner nut and washer on each stud.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

CAUTION: The inner washer and nut prevent direct contact between the power

cable lug and the circuit breaker box, which can cause a short circuit.

9. Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs:

118 Providing Power to the Router

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration

Connect the positive (+) source cable lugs to the return terminals,

which are labeled RTN(+).

Connect the negative (–) source cable lugs to the input terminals, which

are labeled –48V.

10. Install another washer and nut (in that order) on each terminal stud to secure

the power cable lug. Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten the nuts.

11 . Verifythatthesourcepowercablingandthegroundingcablingarecorrect,that

they are not touching or blocking access to router components, and that they

do not drape where people could trip on them.

12. Replace the protective shield over the terminal studs and use a Phillips

screwdriver to tighten the screws.

Figure 60: Connecting Power and Grounding Cables

g001226

Terminal studs

Cable lug

Flat washer

To ground

Nut

Grounding

points

Powering On the Router

To power on the router, follow this procedure:

1. Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the

thumbscrews on their faceplates are tightened.

Providing Power to the Router 119

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

2. For each power supply, verify that the source power cables are connected to

the appropriate terminal on the circuit breaker box: the positive (+) source

cable to the return terminal (labeled RTN(+)) and the negative (–) source cable to

the input terminal (labeled –48V).

3. Verify that an external management device is connected to one of the

RoutingEngineportsontheCIP(

AUXILIARY,CONSOLE,orETHERNET). For more

information on connecting management devices, see Connecting the Router

to Management and Alarm Devices on page 112.

4. Turn on the power to the external management device.

5. Press one power switch on the circuit box to the ON (|)position.

6. Observe the LEDs on the power supply faceplate:

As an enhanced power supply powers on, the green CB ON LED lights

steadily, the blue OUTPUT OK LED blinks for a short time, then lights

steadily, and the amber CB OFF LED does not light.

As an original power supply powers on, the green CB ON LED lights

steadily, the blue OUTPUT OK LED blinks for a short time, then lights

steadily, and the amber CB OFF and NO AIRFLOW LEDs do not light.

NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning

it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before

turning it off.

If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply,

the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If

the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router

again, first issue the CLI request system halt command. For more information, see

“Disconnecting Power from the Router” on page 200.

After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status

indicators—such as LEDs on the power supply, show chassis commands, and

messages on the craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is

functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.

7. Press the other power switch on the circuit breaker box to the ON (|) position

and observe the LEDs on the second power supply faceplate. They should light

as described in the previous step.

If the LEDs are not lit in the appropriate pattern after 60 seconds, repeat the

power supply and cable installation procedures described in “Reinstalling

thePowerSupplies”onpage109and“ConnectingPowertotheRouter”

on page 117.

8. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor

the startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.

120 Providing Power to the Router

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration

Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software

The router is shipped with the JUNOS Internet software preinstalled and ready

to be configured when the router is powered on. There are three copies of

thesoftware:oneonanonrotatingflashdriveintheRoutingEngine,one

on a rotating hard drive in the Routing Engine, and one on a PC card that

canbeinsertedintotheslotintheRoutingEnginefaceplate.

When the router boots, it first attempts to start the image on the PC card. If

a PC card is not inserted into the Routing Engine or the attempt otherwise fails,

the router next tries the flash drive, and finally the hard drive.

You configure the router by issuing JUNOS command-line interface (CLI) commands,

either on a console device attached to the CONSOLE port on the CIP, or over a telnet

connection to a network connected to the ETHERNET port on the CIP.

Gather the following information before configuring the router:

Name the router will use on the network

Domain name the router will use

IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface

IP address of a default router

IP address of a DNS server

Password for the root user

To configure the software, follow this procedure:

1. If the router is not already turned on, power it on as described in “Powering On

the Router” on page 119.

2. Loginasthe“root”user. Thereisnopassword.

3. Start the CLI.

root# cli

root@>

4. Enter configuration mode.

cli> configure

[edit]

root@#

5. Configurethenameoftherouter. Ifthenameincludesspaces,enclosethe

name in quotation marks (“ ”).

[edit]

root@# set system host-name host-name

Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software 121

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

6. Configure the router’s domain name.

[edit]

root@# set system domain-name domain-name

7. Configure the IP address and prefix length for the router’s Ethernet interface.

[edit]

root@# set interfaces fxp0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length

8. Configure the IP address of a backup router, which is used only while the

routing protocol is not running.

[edit]

root@# set system backup-router address

9. Configure the IP address of a DNS server.

[edit]

root@# set system name-server address

10. Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear-text password,

an encrypted password, or an ssh public key string (DSA or RSA).

[edit]

root@# set system root-authentication plain-text-password

New password: password

Retype new password: password

[edit]

root@# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password

[edit]

root@# set system root-authentication ssh-dsa public-key

[edit]

root@# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key

11 . Optionally, display the configuration to verify that it is correct.

[edit]

root@# show

system {

host-name host-name ;

domain-name domain-name ;

backup-router address ;

root-authentication {

authentication-method (password |public-key );

}

name-server {

address ;

122 Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software

Connecting the Router and Performing Initial Configuration

}

interfaces {

fxp0 {

unit 0 {

family inet {

address address/prefix-length ;

}

12. Commit the configuration to activate it on the router.

[edit]

root@# commit

13. Optionally, configure additional properties by adding the necessary

configuration statements. Then commit the changes to activate them on

the router.

[edit]

root@host# commit

14. When you have finished configuring the router, exit configuration mode.

[edit]

root@host# exit

root@host>

Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software 123

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

124 Configuring the JUNOS Internet Software

Part 3

Hardware Maintenance, Replacement,

and Troubleshooting Procedures

Maintaining Hardware Components on page 127

Replacing Hardware Components on page 139

Troubleshooting Hardware Components on page 207

Hardware Maintenance, Replacement, and Troubleshooting Procedures 125

126 Hardware Maintenance, Replacement, and Troubleshooting Procedures

Chapter 10

Maintaining Hardware Components

This chapter describes how to maintain hardware components installed in the

router. Some components, such as the Connector Interface Panel (CIP), require

no maintenance.

For information about returning a part to Juniper Networks for repair or

replacement, see “Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware” on

page 255.

Routine Maintenance Procedures on page 127

Maintaining Cooling System Components on page 127

Maintaining Host Module Components on page 131

Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 132

Maintaining Power Supplies on page 137

Routine Maintenance Procedures

For optimum router performance, perform the following preventive

maintenance procedures regularly:

Inspect the installation site for moisture, loose wires or cables, and excessive

dust. Make sure that airflow is unobstructed around the router and into

the air intake vents.

Check the status-reporting devices on the craft interface: system alarms, LEDs,

and LCD. See Craft Interface on page 27.

Inspect the air filters at the bottom front and left rear of the router, cleaning or

replacing it as needed for optimum cooling system performance. Do not run

the router for more than a few minutes without the air filters in place. For

maintenance instructions, see “Maintaining the Air Filter” on page 128.

Maintaining Cooling System Components

For instructions on maintaining cooling system components, see the following

sections:

Maintaining Cooling System Components 127

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Maintaining the Air Filter on page 128

Maintaining the Fan Tray and Impellers on page 130

Maintaining the Air Filter

Check the air filter regularly for dust and debris. Clean or replace it as needed.

The air filter is hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs) on page 4. Take note of the following caution, however.

CAUTION: Do not operate the router for more than a few minutes when the air

filter has been removed. The fans and impellers are powerful enough to draw in

foreign material, such as bits of wire, through the unfiltered air intake, which could

damage router components.

To maintain the air filter, perform the following procedures:

Removing the Air Filter on page 128

Cleaning the Air Filter on page 129

Installing the Air Filter on page 129

Removing the Air Filter

The air filter is located at the front of the chassis, below the FPC card cage

and cable management system (see Figure 61).

To remove the air filter, follow this procedure:

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the air filter cover.

3. Grasp the edges of the air filter and pull it away from the front of the chassis.

4. Inspect the filter for dust, dirt, and holes. If needed, clean it as described in

“Cleaning the Air Filter” on page 129 or replace it.

128 Maintaining Cooling System Components

Maintaining Hardware Components

Figure 61: Removing the Air Filter

1217

Air filter

Air filter cover

Air intake

cover

1217

Thumbscrew

Cleaning the Air Filter

To clean the air filter, follow this procedure:

1. Pull the filter free of the air filter cover (see Figure 62).

2. Rinse the filter with water, running the water from the back side to the front

side to help remove dust and particles accumulated in the filter.

3. Allow the filter to dry completely.

4. Press the filter back into the air filter cover.

Figure 62: Removing the Filter from the Air Filter Cover

1235

Air filter

Air filter cover

Installing the Air Filter

To install the air filter, follow this procedure (see Figure 63):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

Maintaining Cooling System Components 129

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Grasp the sides of the air filter and push it firmly into place over the air

intake vent.

3. Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the air filter cover.

Figure 63: Installing the Air Filter

1218

Air filter

Air filter cover

Maintaining the Fan Tray and Impellers

The fan tray is attached to the back of the cable management system and

installs into the front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 1. There are also

three separate, non-interchangeable impeller assemblies. The front impeller

is located behind the craft interface (shown in Figure 1) and works together

with the fan tray to cool the FPCs and midplane. The upper and lower

impellers on the rear of the chassis (shown in Figure 2) work together to cool

the components that install into the rear of the chassis.

To check the status of the impellers and the fans in the fan tray, issue the

show chassis environment command. The output includes an entry for each impeller

(which it refers to as a Blower) and for each fan in the fan tray:

user@host> show chassis environment

Class Item Status Measurement

...

Fans Rear Bottom Blower OK Spinning at normal speed

Rear Top Blower OK Spinning at normal speed

Front Top Blower OK Spinning at normal speed

Fan Tray Rear Left OK Spinning at normal speed

Fan Tray Rear Right OK Spinning at normal speed

Fan Tray Front Left OK Spinning at normal speed

Fan Tray Front Right OK Spinning at normal speed

...

130 Maintaining Cooling System Components

Maintaining Hardware Components

For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class

of Service, Chassis, and Management.

Maintaining Host Module Components

The router can have a Routing Engine in each of the slots labeled RE 0 and RE

1and a Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS) in each of the slots labeled

MCS 0 and MCS 1 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3. Each paired

Routing Engine and MCS function together as a host module. To maintain

the host module, perform the following procedures regularly:

Check the LCD and the host module LEDs on the craft interface. The LCD

reports host module status during normal operation and describes the cause of

failures when they occur. The green LEDs labeled ONLINE and MASTER light

steadily for the master host module when it is functioning normally. The

ONLINE LED also lights for the standby host module if it is installed. For more

information about the LEDs and LCD, see Craft Interface on page 27.

Issue the CLI show chassis routing-engine command to check the status of the

Routing Engines. As shown in the sample output, the master Routing Engine is

designated Master in the Current state field:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine

Routing Engine status:

Slot 0:

Current state Master

Election priority Master (default)

Temperature 37 degreesC/98degrees F

DRAM 768 MB

Memory utilization 18 percent

CPU utilization:

User 0 percent

Background 0 percent

Kernel 2 percent

Interrupt 0 percent

Idle 98 percent

Model RE-2.0

Serial ID 8b00000792898b01

Start time 2003-04-29 16:09:49 PDT

Uptime 16 days, 3 hours, 6 minutes, 34 seconds

Load averages: 1 minute 5 minute 15 minute

0.00 0.00 0.00

Routing Engine status:

Slot 1:

Current state Backup

Election priority Backup (default)

Temperature 36 degreesC/96degrees F

DRAM 768 MB

Memory utilization 16 percent

CPU utilization:

User 0 percent

Maintaining Host Module Components 131

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Background 0 percent

Kernel 0 percent

Interrupt 0 percent

Idle 100 percent

Model RE-2.0

Serial ID 6d000007c8150801

Start time 2003-04-22 10:01:29 PDT

Uptime 16 days, 3 hours, 6 minutes, 34 seconds

Issue the CLI show chassis environment mcs command to check the status of the

MCSs. As shown in the sample output, the MCS that belongs to the master

host module is designated Master in the State field:

user@host> show chassis environment mcs

MCS 0 status:

State Online Master

Temperature 48 degrees C / 118 degrees F

Power:

3.3 V 3299 mV

5.0 V 4971 mV

12.0 V 11770 mV

5.0 V bias 4989 mV

8.0 V bias 8246 mV

BUS Revision 12

FPGA Revision 13

MCS 1 status:

State Online Standby

Temperature 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F

Power:

3.3V 3316 mV

5.0 V 5001 mV

12.0 V 11775 mV

5.0 V bias 5001 mV

8.0 V bias 8249 mV

BUS Revision 12

FPGA Revision 13

For further description of the output from the commands, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class

of Service, Chassis, and Management.

Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components

For instructions on maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine components, see the

following sections:

Maintaining FPCs on page 133

Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables on page 134

Maintaining the PCGs on page 135

132 Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Maintaining Hardware Components

Maintaining SFMs on page 136

Maintaining FPCs

The router can have up to eight Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) mounted

vertically in the FPC card cage at the front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 1.

To maintain FPCs, perform the following procedures regularly:

Check the LCD on the craft interface and the LEDs on the craft interface

directly above each FPC slot. The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when

an FPC is functioning normally. For more information, see “FPC LEDs and

Offline Button” on page 31.

Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed FPCs.

Asshowninthesampleoutput,thevalueOnline in the column labeled State

indicates that the FPC is functioning normally:

user@host> show chassis fpc

Temp CPU Utilization (%) Memory Utilization (%)

Slot State (C) Total Interrupt DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer

0 Online 37 4 0 32 1 39

1 Online 39 4 0 32 1 39

2 Empty

3 Online 34 1 0 32 1 40

4 Empty

5 Online 35 4 0 32 2 40

6 Online 36 4 0 32 1 39

7 Empty

For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example also

specifies a slot number (0), which is optional:

user@host> show chassis fpc detail 0

Slot 0 information:

State Online

Temperature 37 degreesC/98degrees F

Total CPU DRAM 32 MB

Total SRAM 4 MB

Total SDRAM 256 MB

I/O Manager ASIC information Version 2.0, Foundry IBM, Part number 0

Start time: 2003-04-29 16:11:55 PDT

Uptime: 5 days, 21 hours, 32 minutes, 41 seconds

For further description of the output from the commands, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of

Service, Chassis, and Management.

Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components 133

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables

To maintain PICs and PIC cables, follow these guidelines:

Check the LEDs on PIC faceplates. Most PIC faceplates have an LED labeled

STATUS.SomePICshaveadditionalLEDs,oftenoneperport.Themeaningof

the LED states differs for various PICs. For more information, see the M160

Internet Router PIC Guide.IftheFPCthathousesthePICdetectsaPICfailure,

the FPC generates an alarm message to be sent to the Routing Engine.

Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The PIC slots in an FPC are

numbered from 0through 3, top to bottom:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

PIC 0 4x OC-3 SONET, MM

PIC 1 1x CSTM1, SMIR

PIC 3 2x OC-3 ATM, MM

Slot 1 Online

PIC 0 1x OC-12 SONET, MM

PIC 1 1x OC-12 ATM, MM

PIC 2 2x OC-3 ATM, MM

PIC 3 2x OC-3 ATM, MM

For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS

Protocols, Class of Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

Use the cable management system (shown in Figure 21) to support cables and

prevent cables from dislodging or developing stress points.

Place excess cable out of the way in the cable management system. Do

not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle from the connector or cable

management system, because this stresses the cable at the fastening point.

Putting fasteners on the loops helps to maintain their shape.

Keep the cable connections clean and free of dust and other particles, which

can cause drops in the received power level. Always inspect cables and clean

them if necessary before connecting an interface.

Label both ends of PIC cables to identify them.

134 Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Maintaining Hardware Components

The following guidelines apply specifically to fiber-optic cable:

When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a PIC, always place a rubber safety

plug over the transceiver on the PIC faceplate and on the end of the cable.

Anchor fiber-optic cable to avoid stress on the connectors. When attaching

fiber to a PIC, be sure to secure the fiber so it is not supporting its own weight

as it hangs to the floor. Never let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.

Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its bend radius. An arc smaller than

a few inches can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to

diagnose.

Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cable into and out of optical

instruments, such as ATM or SONET/SDH analyzers, can cause damage to

the instruments that is expensive to repair. Instead, attach a short fiber

extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent

plugging and unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which

is easy and inexpensive to replace.

Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Small micro-deposits of oil and dust

in the canal of the transceiver or cable connector could cause loss of light,

reducing signal power and possibly causing intermittent problems with the

optical connection.

To clean the transceivers, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device, such as

RIFOCS Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the

directions for the cleaning kit you use.

After you have cleaned the transceiver on the fiber-optic PIC, make sure that

the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable is clean. Use only an approved

alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit, such as the Opptex Cletop-S® Fiber

Cleaner. Follow the directions for the cleaning kit you use.

Maintaining the PCGs

The router has two Packet Forwarding Engine Clock Generators (PCGs) installed in

the slots labeled PCG 0 and PCG 1 on the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3.

To maintain the PCGs, perform the following procedures regularly:

Check the LEDs on the PCG faceplates. The green LED labeled OK lights

steadily when the PCG is functioning normally. The blue LED labeled

MASTER lights steadily on the master PCG. For more information, see “PCG

Components” on page 19.

Issue the CLI show chassis environment pcg command to check the status of

the PCGs. As shown in the sample output, the master PCG is designated

Online - Master clock and the standby PCG Online - Standby:

user@host> show chassis environment pcg

PCG 0 status:

Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components 135

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

State Online - Master clock

Temperature 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F

Frequency:

Setting 125.00 MHz

Measurement 125.01 MHz

Power:

3.3 V 3274 mV

5.0 V bias 4974 mV

8.0 V bias 8183 mV

BUS Revision 12

PCG 1 status:

State Online - Standby

Temperature 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F

Frequency:

Setting 125.00 MHz

Measurement 125.03 MHz

Power:

3.3 V 3267 mV

5.0 V bias 4993 mV

8.0 V bias 8190 mV

BUS Revision 12

For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of

Service, Chassis, and Management.

Maintaining SFMs

The router can have a Switching and Forwarding Module (SFM) in each of the slots

labeled SFM 0 through SFM 3 at the rear of the chassis, as shown in Figure 3.

To maintain the SFMs, perform the following procedures regularly:

Check the LEDs on the SFM faceplates. The green LED labeled OK lights

steadily when an SFM is functioning normally. For more information, see

“SFM Components” on page 20.

Issue the CLI show chassis sfm command to check the status of the SFMs. The

following sample output is for a router with four SFMs installed:

user@host> show chassis sfm

Temp CPU Utilization (%) Memory Utilization (%)

Slot State (C) Total Interrupt DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer

0 Online 41 3 0 64 19 46

1 Online 42 5 0 64 19 46

2 Online 43 4 0 64 19 46

3 Online 41 3 0 64 19 46

For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example also

specifies a slot number (1), which is optional:

user@host> show chassis sfm detail 1

136 Maintaining Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Maintaining Hardware Components

Slot 1 information:

State Online

SPP Temperature 43 degrees C / 109 degrees F

SPR Temperature 43 degrees C / 109 degrees F

Total CPU DRAM 64 MB

Total SSRAM 8 MB

Internet Processor II Version 1, Foundry IBM, Part number 9

Start time: 2003-04-29 16:12:26 PDT

Uptime: 5 days, 22 hours, 28 minutes, 26 seconds

Packet scheduling mode : Disabled

For further description of the output from the commands, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of

Service, Chassis, and Management.

Maintaining Power Supplies

To verify that the power system is functioning normally, perform

the following procedures regularly:

Check the LEDs on the faceplate of both power supplies. A power supply

is functioning correctly when the green LED labeled CB ON is lit steadily

(indicating that the circuit breaker is switched on) and the blue LED labeled

OUTPUT OK is lit steadily (indicating that the supply is receiving power from

the DC source).

If these LEDs are blinking or other LEDs are lit, there could be an error

condition. For a summary of LED states, see “Power Supply” on page 36.

Issue the following CLI command to check the status of the power supplies.

The following example specifies a slot number (0), which is optional. As shown

in the sample output, the value Online in the State column indicates that the

power supply is operating normally:

user@host> show chassis environment pem 0

PEM 0 status:

State Online

Temperature OK

DC input OK

DC Output OK

Load Less than 40 percent

Voltage:

48.0 V input 55059 mV

48.0 V fan supply 50181 mV

5.0 V bias 5032 mV

8.0 V bias 8224 mV

Maintaining Power Supplies 137

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

NOTE: The messages in the craft interface LCD and the output from CLI show

commands refer to the power supply on the right as PEM 0 and the power supply

on the left as PEM 1.

For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of

Service, Chassis, and Management.

Check the red and yellow alarm LEDs and the LCD on the craft interface.

Power supply failure or removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of

the LEDs to light and an error message to appear on the LCD. You can display

the associated error messages by issuing the following CLI command:

user@host> show chassis alarms

For a list of possible alarm messages, see “Chassis and Interface Alarm

Messages” on page 209.

Verify that the power source has the proper current rating and that each power

supply is connected to a separate power source.

Verify that the cable or cord connecting the power supply to the external

power source is securely in place and that there is no moisture accumulating

near the router.

Verify that the cable or cord from the power source to the router is not

damaged. If the insulation is cracked or broken, replace the cable or cord

immediately.

Verify that the power cables or cord do not touch or obstruct access to other

router components, and that they do not drape where people could trip

on them.

Verify that the air flow in and out of cooling system components is not

obstructed.

138 Maintaining Power Supplies

Chapter 11

Replacing Hardware Components

Most of the router’s hardware components are field-replaceable units (FRUs), which

means that you can remove and replace them yourself. When you need to replace a

router component, contact your customer support or sales representative to order

the field-replaceable unit (FRU) that contains the component. For instructions, see

“Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware” on page 255. For a list of

the FRUs on the M160 router, see Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4.

Tools and Parts Required on page 139

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables on page 141

Replacing Cooling System Components on page 148

Replacing Host Module Components on page 159

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 169

Replacing Power System Components on page 193

Tools and Parts Required

To replace hardware components, you need the tools and parts listed in Table 24.

Tools and Parts Required 139

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Table 24: Tools and Parts Required

Tool or part Components

Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat CIP

Craft interface

FPC

Front impeller assembly

MCS

PIC

PCG

Routing Engine

SFM

Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

grounding wrist strap

All

Flat-blade (–) screwdriver, 2.5 mm Alarm relay contacts on CIP

Flat-blade screwdriver,

approximately 1/4 in. (6 mm)

Craft interface

Front impeller assembly

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers

1and2

Air filter

CIP

Circuit breaker box

Craft interface

DC power cables (to remove protective shield over

circuit breaker box)

Fan tray

Fuse (to remove rear lower impeller assembly)

Impeller assembly

PCG

PIC

Power supply

Routing Engine

SFM

7/16-in. hexagonal-head external

drive socket wrench, or nut driver,

with a minimum of 30 lb-in.

(3.5 Nm) tightening torque

(See following note.)

Circuit breaker box (to remove or install power cables)

DC power cables

140 Tools and Parts Required

Replacing Hardware Components

Tool or part Components

Wire cutters Alarm relay contacts on CIP

Rubber safety cap Fiber-optic PIC or PIC cable

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables

The CIP is located to the left side of the FPC card cage, as shown in Figure 1. It

houses the Routing Engine interface ports, which accept connections to external

management and alarm-reporting devices.

The CIP is field-replaceable, but you must power off the router before removing or

installingit.Itweighsabout6.5lb(3kg).Thecablesandwirethatconnecttothe

Routing Engine interface ports are hot-removable and hot-insertable.

To replace the CIP and cables connecting to the Routing Engine interface ports,

perform the following procedures:

Removing the CIP on page 141

Installing the CIP on page 143

Replacing Connections to Routing Engine Interface Ports on page 145

Removing the CIP

To remove the CIP, follow this procedure (see Figure 64):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing

Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut

down the router software. (If two Routing Engines are installed, also issue the

command on the backup Routing Engine.)

user@host> request system halt

NOTE: Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating

system has halted.

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables 141

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

3. Press the power switch for both power supplies to the OFF (0) position. The

switches are on the circuit breaker box.

4. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

5. Disconnect any external devices connected to the CIP. For instructions, see

“Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable” on page 146, “Replacing the

Console or Auxiliary Cable” on page 146, and “Replace Alarm Relay Wires”

on page 147.

6. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screw at each end of the

CIP faceplate.

7. Grasp the CIP and slide it out of the chassis. Place it in the electrostatic bag or

on the antistatic mat.

CAUTION: Be sure to slide the CIP straight within the slot to avoid damaging the

connector pins on the front of the midplane.

142 Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 64: Removing the CIP

1260

Installing the CIP

To install the CIP, follow this procedure (see Figure 65):

1. Verify that the router is powered down.

2. Carefully insert the rear of the CIP into the guides at the top and bottom of the

CIP slot, which is located to the left of the FPC card cage.

NOTE: The components on the CIP are on the left side of the board, unlike the

components of an FPC, which are on the right side. Verify that the components are

on the left before inserting the CIP.

3. Slide the CIP into the chassis until it contacts the midplane.

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables 143

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Be sure to slide the CIP straight within the slot to avoid damaging the

connector pins on the front of the midplane.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screw at each end of the CIP faceplate.

5. Reattach an external management device to one of the Routing Engine ports

on the CIP (AUXILIARY,CONSOLE,orETHERNET). Also reattach alarm relay contacts

if desired. For instructions, see “Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable”

on page 146, “Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable” on page 146, and

“Replace Alarm Relay Wires” on page 147.

6. Power on the router and verify correct startup by performing the procedures in

“Powering On the Router” on page 119.

Figure 65: Installing the CIP

1259

144 Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables

Replacing Hardware Components

Replacing Connections to Routing Engine Interface Ports

TheportsontheCIPconnecttheRoutingEnginetoexternalmanagementdevices

(see Figure 66).

Figure 66: Routing Engine Interface Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

AUXILIARY

HOST

YEL=10Mb

GRN=100Mb

ACT

BITS A

BITS B

LINK

RED ALARM

YELLOW

ALARM

LINK

1204

Alarm relay

contacts

BITS

input ports

Routing

Engine ports

To replace the cables that connect to the ports, perform the procedures described in

the following sections:

Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on page 146

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables 145

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 146

Replace Alarm Relay Wires on page 147

Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable

To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management, connect

an Ethernet cable with RJ-45/RJ-45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the CIP. One

such cable is provided with the router. For cable specifications, see Routing Engine

Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74. Follow this procedure:

1. If a cable is already installed in the ETHERNET port for the relevant Routing

Engine, perform the following steps:

a. Press the tab on the connector and pull the connector straight out of the

port. Figure 67 shows the connector.

b. Disconnect the cable from the network device.

2. Plug one end of the replacement Ethernet cable into the appropriate ETHERNET

port. Figure 66 shows the external device ports on the CIP. The ports labeled

HOST 0 connect to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot (RE

0), and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the Routing Engine in the lower

Routing Engine slot (RE 1).

3. Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.

Figure 67: Ethernet Cable Connector

g001063

Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable

To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect

it to the appropriate CONSOLE portontheCIP.Tousealaptop,modem,orother

auxiliary device, connect it to the appropriate AUXILIARY port on the CIP. Both

ports accept an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable with DB-9/DB-9 connectors. One

such cable is provided with the router. If you want to connect a device to both

ports, you must supply another cable. For cable specifications, see Routing

Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 74.

To connect a management console or auxiliary device, follow this procedure:

1. If a cable is already installed in the CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port, perform the

following steps:

a. Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.

146 Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables

Replacing Hardware Components

b. Unscrew the screws that secure the cable connector to the port, using a

2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver if necessary.

c. Pull the cable connector straight out of the port.

d. Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device.

2. Plug the female end of the replacement serial cable into the appropriate

CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port. Figure 66 shows the external device ports on the

CIP. The ports labeled HOST 0 connect to the Routing Engine in the upper

Routing Engine slot (RE 0), and the ports labeled HOST 1 connect to the Routing

Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot (RE 1).

3. Tighten the screws on the connector, using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver if

necessary.

4. Power on the auxiliary or console device.

Figure 68: Serial Port Connector

1027

Replace Alarm Relay Wires

To connect the router to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires

to the RED ALARM and YELLOW ALARM relay contacts on the CIP. A system

condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface

also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact.

The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied

with the router. They accept wire of any gauge between 24-AWG and

12-AWG (0.20 and 3.33 mm2), which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire

appropriate for the external device you are connecting.

To replace the wires connecting to an alarm-reporting device, follow

this procedure (see Figure 66:

1. Disconnect the existing wire at the external device.

2. Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 24-AWG

and 12-AWG (0.20 and 3.33 mm2).

3. Usinga2.5mmflat-bladescrewdriver,loosenthesmallscrewsonthefaceof

the terminal block and remove the block from the relay contact.

4. Usingthe2.5mmflat-bladescrewdriver,loosenthesmallscrewsonthesideof

the terminal block. Remove existing wires from the slots in the front of the

block and insert replacement wires. Tighten the screws to secure the wire.

Replacing the CIP and Routing Engine Interface Port Cables 147

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

5. Orient the terminal block according to the labels to the left of the appropriate

relay contact (NC means “normally closed,” Cmeans “common,” and NO

means “normally open”).

6. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact and use a 2.5 mm flat-blade

screwdriver to tighten the screws on the face of the block.

7. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.

Replacing Cooling System Components

For instructions on replacing cooling system components, see the following sections:

Replacing the Fan Tray on page 148

Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 150

Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 154

Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 156

Replacing the Fan Tray

To replace the fan tray, perform the following procedures:

Removing the Fan Tray on page 148

Installing the Fan Tray on page 149

Removing the Fan Tray

The fan tray is located behind the cable management system on the front of the

chassis, as shown in Figure 1. It weighs approximately 13 lb (5.9 kg).

To remove the fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 69):

1. Unwrap any PIC cables from the spools on the cable management system

and remove the cables from the tray. Arrange the cables so that they do not

block the front of the cable management system and tray, and secure them

with temporary fasteners so that they are not supporting their own weight

as they hang from the connector.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow

fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

148 Replacing Cooling System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the fan tray, using a Phillips screwdriver

if necessary.

4. Grasp the sides of the fan tray and pull firmly to slide it halfway out of the

chassis.

CAUTION: To avoid injury, keep tools and your fingers away from the fans as you

slide the fan tray out of the chassis. The fans might still be spinning.

5. Place one hand under the fan tray to support it and slide the tray completely

out of the chassis after the fans stop spinning.

Figure 69: Removing the Fan Tray

1936

Installing the Fan Tray

To install the fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 70):

CAUTION: When sliding the fan tray into the chassis, take care not to catch and

pinch any dangling PIC cables with the edges of the tray. Also make sure your

fingers are not near the fans, which start spinning as soon as the fan tray contacts

the midplane.

Replacing Cooling System Components 149

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Grasp the sides of the fan tray and align the rear of the tray with the guides

inside the chassis.

3. Slidethefantrayallthewayintothechassis.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the cable management system.

5. Rearrange the PIC cables in the cable management system. For more

information about proper cable arrangement, see “Maintaining PICs and

PIC Cables” on page 134.

Figure 70: Installing the Fan Tray

1937

Replacing the Front Impeller Assembly

The front impeller assembly, which includes the craft interface, is located at the

front of the chassis above the FPC card cage, as shown in Figure 1. The assembly

weighs approximately 14.5 lb (6.6 kg). The assembly is hot-removable and

hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4.

The craft interface is attached to the front of the front impeller assembly. If you are

removing the front impeller assembly to replace it and the replacement assembly

does not have a craft interface already installed on it, you must transfer the craft

interface from the removed assembly to the replacement assembly. Perform the

procedures described in the following sections:

Removing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 151

Removing the Craft Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly on page 152

150 Replacing Cooling System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Installing the Craft Interface on the Front Impeller Assembly on page 153

Installing the Front Impeller Assembly on page 154

If the replacement front impeller assembly already has a craft interface on it,

perform only the procedures in “Removing the Front Impeller Assembly” on

page 151 and “Installing the Front Impeller Assembly” on page 154.

Removing the Front Impeller Assembly

To remove the front impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 71):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the captive screw at each corner of the

craft interface.

4. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the gap around the craft interface and

gently pry the impeller assembly forward until you can grasp the sides of the

assembly and slide it halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: To avoid injury, as you slide the assembly out of the chassis do not touch

any part of the impeller behind the front panel—the impeller might still be spinning.

5. Place one hand under the assembly to support it. When the impeller is no

longer spinning, slide the assembly completely out of the chassis and place it

on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

6. If you are replacing the front impeller assembly and the replacement assembly

hasacraftinterfacepanelinstalledonit,proceedto“InstallingtheFront

Impeller Assembly” on page 154. Otherwise, proceed to “Removing the Craft

Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly” on page 152.

Replacing Cooling System Components 151

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 71: Removing the Front Impeller Assembly

1215

Captive screw

Removing the Craft Interface from the Front Impeller Assembly

If you are replacing the front impeller assembly and the replacement assembly

does not have a craft interface panel on the front, you must transfer the craft

interface from the removed assembly to the replacement assembly. To remove the

craft interface from the removed impeller assembly, follow this procedure:

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Place the removed and replacement impeller assemblies top side up on

antistatic mats.

3. If not immediately transferring the craft interface panel to the replacement

assembly, place an antistatic mat or electrostatic bag on a flat, stable surface to

receive it.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screws from the three semicircular

metal tabs on the back of the craft interface that secure it to the impeller

assembly (see Figure 72). Save the screws.

5. Grasp the ends of the craft interface, pull upward to release the hooks on the

back of it from the windows on the front of the impeller assembly, then pull

it toward you to free the craft interface completely (see Figure 73). If not

immediately transferring it to a replacement impeller assembly, place it in the

electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.

152 Replacing Cooling System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 72: Removing the Screws along the Top Front Edge of the Front Impeller Assembly

Upper

impeller

Craft interface

Screws

Top Down View

1592

Figure 73: Removing the Craft Interface

1594

Hook Window

Installing the Craft Interface on the Front Impeller Assembly

To attach the craft interface to the front impeller assembly, follow this procedure:

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Place the replacement impeller assembly top side up on an antistatic mat on a

flat, stable surface.

Replacing Cooling System Components 153

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

3. Attach the craft interface to the front of the impeller assembly, making sure

that the hooks on the back of the craft interface clip securely into the windows

onthefrontoftheimpellerassembly(seeFigure73).

4. Align the holes in the three semicircular metal tabs on the back of the craft

interface with the corresponding holes in the top of the impeller assembly.

5. Insert the screws you saved when removing the craft interface into the three

holes and tighten using a Phillips screwdriver (see Figure 72).

Installing the Front Impeller Assembly

To install the front impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 74):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Grasp the sides of the impeller assembly and align the rear of the assembly

with the guides inside the chassis.

3. Slide the impeller assembly all the way into the chassis.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the captive screw at each corner of the

craft interface.

Figure 74: Installing the Front Impeller Assembly

1216

Captive screw

Replacing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

The rear lower impeller assembly is located at the lower left of the rear of the

chassis, above the left power supply, as shown in Figure 2. It weighs about 4 lb

(1.8 kg).

154 Replacing Cooling System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

The assembly is hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs) on page 4. To replace it, perform the following procedures:

Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155

Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly on page 155

Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

To remove the rear lower impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 75):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover, using a Phillips

screwdriver if necessary.

3. Grasp the thumbscrews at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the

assembly halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: To avoid injury, as you slide the assembly out of the chassis do not touch

any part of the impeller behind the front panel—the impeller might still be spinning.

4. When the impeller is no longer spinning, slide the assembly completely

outofthechassis.

Figure 75: Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

1914

Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

To install the rear lower impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 76:

Replacing Cooling System Components 155

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Orient the impeller so that the label is on the top. Align the rails on the upper

edges of the impeller assembly with the guides inside the chassis.

3. Pushtheimpellerassemblyupandtotherighttostartitintothechassis,

then slide it all the way in.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover.

Figure 76: Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly

1915

Rails

Guides

Label

Replacing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

The rear upper impeller assembly is located at the upper left of the rear of the

chassis, as shown in Figure 2. It weighs about 4 lb (1.8 kg).

The assembly is hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs) on page 4. To replace it, perform the following procedures:

Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 157

Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly on page 158

156 Replacing Cooling System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

To remove the rear upper impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 77

and Figure 78, which show the two types of impeller that can be installed):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover, using a Phillips

screwdriver if necessary.

3. Grasp the thumbscrews at opposite corners of the impeller cover and slide the

assembly halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: To avoid injury, as you slide the assembly out of the chassis do not touch

any part of the impeller behind the front panel—the impeller might still be spinning.

4. When the impeller is no longer spinning, slide the assembly completely

outofthechassis.

Figure 77: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1211

Replacing Cooling System Components 157

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 78: Removing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1933

Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

To install the rear upper impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 79

and Figure 80, which show the two types of impeller that can be installed):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Slide the assembly all the way into the chassis.

3. Tighten the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover.

Figure 79: Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1212

158 Replacing Cooling System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 80: Installing the Rear Upper Impeller Assembly

1934

Replacing Host Module Components

For instructions on replacing host module components, see the following sections:

Replacing an MCS on page 159

Removing and Insert the PC Card on page 163

Replacing a Routing Engine on page 165

Replacing an MCS

The MCSs are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page

4. For a description of the effect of removing an MCS, see Host Module on page 22.

To replace an MCS, perform the following procedures:

Removing an MCS on page 159

Installing an MCS on page 161

Removing an MCS

To remove an MCS, follow this procedure (see Figure 81):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

Replacing Host Module Components 159

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

3. Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each

corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis. For complete

instructions, see “Removing the Rear Component Cover” on page 86.

4. If two host modules are installed, use one of the following two methods to

determine which is functioning as master:

Note which of the green host module MASTER LEDs is lit on the craft

interface.

Issue the following CLI command. The master Routing Engine is

designated Master in the Current state field:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine

Routing Engine status:

Slot 0:

Current state Master

...

5. If the component you are removing belongs to the master host module and a

second host module is installed, issue the following CLI command to switch

mastership to the standby host module:

user@host> request chassis routing-engine master switch

If the Routing Engines are running JUNOS Release 6.0 or later and are

configured for graceful switchover, the standby Routing Engine immediately

assumes Routing Engine functions and there is no interruption to packet

forwarding. Otherwise, packet forwarding halts while the standby Routing

Engine becomes the master and the Packet Forwarding Engine components

reset and connect to the new master Routing Engine. For information about

configuring graceful switchover, see the section about Routing Engine

redundancy in the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

NOTE: Router performance might change if the standby Routing Engine’s

configuration differs from the former master’s configuration. For the most

predictable performance, configure the two Routing Engines identically, except

for parameters unique to a Routing Engine, such as the hostname defined at the

[edit system] hierarchy level and the management interface (fxp0 or equivalent)

defined at the [edit interfaces] hierarchy level.

To configure Routing Engine-specific parameters and still use the same configuration

on both Routing Engines, include the appropriate configuration statements under

the re0 and re1 statements at the [edit groups] hierarchy level and use the apply-groups

statement. For instructions, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

160 Replacing Host Module Components

Replacing Hardware Components

6. On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine

that is paired with the CB you are removing, enter CLI operational mode and

issue the following command. The command shuts down the Routing Engine

cleanly, so its state information is preserved:

user@host> request system halt

NOTE: Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating

system has halted.

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

7. Push the end of each extractor clip (located at each end of the MCS) outward.

8. Grasp the extractor clips and slide the MCS about halfway out of the chassis.

9. Place one hand under the MCS to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Figure 81: Removing an MCS

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

1928

Extractor clip

Installing an MCS

To install an MCS, follow this procedure (see Figure 82):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

Replacing Host Module Components 161

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

2. Place one hand under the MCS to support it and grasp one of the extractor

clips on the faceplate with the other hand.

3. AligntherearoftheMCSwiththeguidesinsidethechassisandslideit

in completely.

4. Press the extractor clip at each end of the MCS inward.

5. Verify that the green LED labeled OK ontheMCSfaceplateislit. Alsocheck

the host module LEDs on the craft interface to verify that the green LED

labeled ONLINE is lit for the host module to which the MCS belongs (Figure 11

shows the LEDs).

You can also verify correct MCS functioning by issuing the

show chassis environment mcs command described in Maintaining Host Module

Components on page 131.

6. Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner

to secure it to the chassis. For complete instructions, see “Reinstalling the Rear

Component Cover” on page 109.

CAUTION: To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding, do

not operate the router without the rear component cover in place.

Figure 82: Installing an MCS

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MSC 0

RE 0

1927

Extractor clip

162 Replacing Host Module Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Removing and Insert the PC Card

The slot labeled PC CARD on the Routing Engine faceplate accepts a Type I PC card,

as defined in the PC Card Standard published by the Personal Computer Memory

Card International Association (PCMCIA). The router is shipped with a PC card that

contains JUNOS Internet software. The PC card can be used to copy JUNOS software

from the PC card onto the Routing Engine. You can also copy JUNOS software from

the Routing Engine onto a PC card, for example, to create a backup copy of upgrade

software that you have obtained from Juniper Networks. Instructions for copying

software to a PC card are available at the Juniper Networks Support Web site

(http://www.juniper.net/support/); after logging in, navigate to the Customer Support

Center, then to the download page for JUNOS Internet software.

NOTE: The appearance and position of electronic components or the PC card

slot on your Routing Engine might differ from the figures in this section. These

differences do not affect Routing Engine installation and removal or functionality.

NOTE: The software on a PCMCIA card is loaded only onto the Routing Engine

into which the PCMCIA card is inserted. It is not automatically copied to the

other Routing Engine.

To remove and insert a PC card, perform the following procedures:

Removing the PC Card on page 163

Insert the PC Card on page 164

Removing the PC Card

The PC card is inserted in the slot labeled PC CARD in the Routing Engine faceplate.

To remove the PC card, follow this procedure (see Figure 83):

1. Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each

corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis. For complete

instructions, see “Removing the Rear Component Cover” on page 86.

2. Press the eject button located next to the PC card slot in the Routing Engine

faceplate. Note that the PC card slot might be located in a different position

from that shown in Figure 83.

3. When the PC card pops partially out of the slot, grasp the card and pull

it straight out of the slot.

Replacing Host Module Components 163

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 83: Removing the PC Card

1926

Eject button

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

Insert the PC Card

To insert the PC card, follow this procedure (see Figure 84):

1. Orient the PC card with the Juniper Networks logo facing in the direction

specified on the Routing Engine faceplate. Insert the card into the slot.

2. Press the card firmly all the way into the slot. Note that the PC card slot might

be located in a different position from that shown in Figure 84.

3. Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner

to secure it to the chassis. For complete instructions, see “Reinstalling the Rear

Component Cover” on page 109.

CAUTION: To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding, do

not operate the router without the rear component cover in place.

164 Replacing Host Module Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 84: Insert the PC Card

1925

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

Replacing a Routing Engine

The Routing Engines are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units

(FRUs) on page 4. For a description of the effect of removing a Routing Engine,

seeHostModuleonpage22.ToreplaceaRoutingEngine,performthefollowing

procedures:

Removing a Routing Engine on page 165

Installing a Routing Engine on page 168

Removing a Routing Engine

To remove a Routing Engine, follow this procedure (see Figure 85):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each

corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis. For complete

instructions, see “Removing the Rear Component Cover” on page 86.

4. If two host modules are installed, use one of the following two methods to

determine which is functioning as master:

Note which of the green host module MASTER LEDs is lit on the craft

interface.

Replacing Host Module Components 165

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Issue the following CLI command. The master Routing Engine is

designated Master in the Current state field:

user@host> show chassis routing-engine

Routing Engine status:

Slot 0:

Current state Master

...

5. If the component you are removing belongs to the master host module and a

second host module is installed, issue the following CLI command to switch

mastership to the standby host module:

user@host> request chassis routing-engine master switch

If the Routing Engines are running JUNOS Release 6.0 or later and are

configured for graceful switchover, the standby Routing Engine immediately

assumes Routing Engine functions and there is no interruption to packet

forwarding. Otherwise, packet forwarding halts while the standby Routing

Engine becomes the master and the Packet Forwarding Engine components

reset and connect to the new master Routing Engine. For information about

configuring graceful switchover, see the section about Routing Engine

redundancy in the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

NOTE: Router performance might change if the standby Routing Engine’s

configuration differs from the former master’s configuration. For the most

predictable performance, configure the two Routing Engines identically, except

for parameters unique to a Routing Engine, such as the hostname defined at the

[edit system] hierarchy level and the management interface (fxp0 or equivalent)

defined at the [edit interfaces] hierarchy level.

To configure Routing Engine-specific parameters and still use the same configuration

on both Routing Engines, include the appropriate configuration statements under

the re0 and re1 statements at the [edit groups] hierarchy level and use the apply-groups

statement. For instructions, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

6. On the console or other management device connected to the Routing

Engine you are removing, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following

command. The command shuts down the Routing Engine cleanly, so its state

information is preserved:

user@host> request system halt

166 Replacing Host Module Components

Replacing Hardware Components

NOTE: Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating

system has halted.

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

7. Usingyourthumbs,pushandholdtheredtaboneachextractorcliptowardthe

outer edge of the unit. Push the ends of the extractor clips outward to unseat

theRoutingEnginefromthechassis.

8. Grasp the extractor clips and slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: Slide the Routing Engine straight out of the chassis. Damage can result if

it gets lodged because of uneven movement.

9. Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it, slide it completely out

of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Figure 85: Removing a Routing Engine

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

PCG 1

1950

Extractor

clip

Replacing Host Module Components 167

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Installing a Routing Engine

NOTE: If two Routing Engines are installed, they must both be the same version.

To install a Routing Engine, follow this procedure (see Figure 86):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine is flipped

toward the outer edge of the unit. If necessary, use your thumbs to push and

hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer edge, then push the

ends of the extractor clips outward.

3. Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it and grasp one of the

extractor clips on the faceplate with the other hand.

4. Align the rear of the Routing Engine with the guide rails inside the chassis

and slide it in completely.

CAUTION: Align the Routing Engine carefully with the guide rails and push it in

evenly. Damage can result if it gets lodged in the rails because of uneven movement.

5. Press the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine inward to seat the

unit firmly in the chassis.

6. Check the host module LEDs on the craft interface to verify that the green

LED labeled ONLINE is lit for the host module to which the Routing Engine

belongs (Figure 11 shows the LEDs).

You can also verify correct Routing Engine functioning by issuing the

show chassis routing-engine command described in Maintaining Host Module

Components on page 131.

7. Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner

to secure it to the chassis. For complete instructions, see “Reinstalling the Rear

Component Cover” on page 109.

CAUTION: To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding, do

not operate the router without the rear component cover in place.

168 Replacing Host Module Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 86: Installing a Routing Engine

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

PCG 1

1951

Extractor

clip

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

For instructions on replacing Packet Forwarding Engine components, see the

following sections:

Replacing an FPC on page 169

Replacing a PCG on page 176

Replacing a PIC on page 179

Replace PIC Cables on page 185

Replacing an SFM on page 188

Replace an SFP on page 190

Replacing an FPC

FPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs) on page 4. When you remove an FPC, forwarding operations halt

forabout200mswhilethePacketForwardingEngineflushesthesharedmemory

buffers on the remaining FPCs.

To replace an FPC, perform the following procedures:

Removing an FPC on page 170

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 169

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Installing an FPC on page 172

Removing an FPC

To remove an FPC, follow this procedure (see Figure 87):

1. Place an antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the FPC. If you are

removing PICs from the FPC, prepare an antistatic mat or electrostatic bag for

each one. If any of the PICs on the FPC use fiber-optic cable, have ready a

rubber safety cap for each transceiver and cable.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Label the cables connected to each PIC on the FPC so that you can later

reconnect the cables to the correct PICs.

4. Use one of the following methods to take the FPC offline:

Press and hold the FPC offline button. The green OK LED next to the

button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes out.

The LEDS and offline button for each FPC are located directly above

it on the craft interface.

Issue the following CLI command:

user@host>request chassis fpc slot

slot-number

offline

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Internet Software

Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis,

and Management.

5. Disconnect the cables from the PICs installed in the FPC. If a PIC uses

fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each

cable with a rubber safety cap. Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable

management system, to prevent the cables from developing stress points.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

170 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

6. If you are transferring any PICs to a different FPC, follow this procedure to

remove them while the FPC is still installed:

a. Unscrew the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the PIC faceplate

simultaneously and at about the same rate (unscrewing the two screws

alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in

the FPC slot, making it difficult to turn the screws).

b. Slide the PIC out of the slot and immediately place it on an antistatic mat

or in an electrostatic bag.

7. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC, using a Phillips screwdriver if

necessary.

8. Pull the ends of the ejector levers, which are adjacent to the thumbscrews,

away from the face of the FPC until they are nearly perpendicular to it.

9. Grasp the top and bottom flanges of the card carrier and slide the FPC about

halfway out of the card cage.

10. Place one hand around the front of the FPC (the PIC housing) and the other

hand under it to support it. Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis, and

place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

CAUTION: The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end. Be prepared to

accept the full weight—up to 29 lb (13.2 kg)—as you slide the FPC out of the chassis.

When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector levers, bus bars,

or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.

Do not stack FPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one individually

in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 171

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

11 . If you are not reinstalling an FPC into the emptied FPC slot within a short

time, install a blank FPC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in

the FPC card cage.

CAUTION: After removing an FPC from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds

before reinserting it, removing an FPC from a different slot, or inserting an FPC

into a different slot.

Figure 87: Removing an FPC

1191

Offline button

Ejector levers

Installing an FPC

To install an FPC, follow this procedure (see Figure 88 and Figure 89):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

172 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that the ends of the ejector levers, which are located at each end of the

FPC, are pushed outward, nearly perpendicular to the face of the FPC.

3. GraspthefrontoftheFPCwithonehandandplacetheotherhandunder

the FPC to support it.

CAUTION: WhentheFPCisoutofthechassis,donotholditbytheejectorlevers,

bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.

4. Align the rear bottom corners of the FPC with the guides at the bottom of the

FPC slot. Slide the FPC into the card cage until it contacts the midplane.

5. Push the ends of the ejector levers inward until they are nearly flush with

the face of the FPC.

6. Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC to seat the FPC securely

in the chassis.

7. If you are installing different PICs in the FPC, follow this procedure for each one:

a. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that there is a rubber safety cap over

each transceiver on the faceplate. Install a cap if necessary.

b. Slide the PIC into a slot in the FPC, aligning the notches in the connector

at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the FPC slot and then firmly

pushing the PIC into place.

CAUTION: Insert the PIC straight into the FPC slot to avoid damaging the

components on the bottom of the PIC.

c. Tighten the thumbscrews at the ends of the PIC faceplate simultaneously

and at about the same rate (tightening the two screws alternately or at very

different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in the FPC slot, making

it difficult to turn the screws). Verify that the PIC is seated properly.

8. If any of the PICs on the FPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber

safety cap from each transceiver and cable.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 173

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

9. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each PIC on

the FPC. Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight.

Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop, using the cable

management system. Placing fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow

fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

10. Use one of the following methods to bring the FPC online:

Press and hold the FPC offline button until the green OK LED next to the

button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds. The LEDS and offline button for

each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface.

Issue the following CLI command:

user@host>request chassis fpc slot

slot-number

online

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Internet Software

Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis,

and Management.

As the FPC comes online, the green FPC LED labeled OK begins to blink. It

continues to blink while the Routing Engine downloads software to the FPC,

the FPC runs its diagnostics, and the PICs housed in the FPC are enabled.

Packet forwarding then halts for about 200 ms while the Packet Forwarding

Engine incorporates the memory on the new FPC into the memory buffers

shared by all FPCs. When the FPC is online, the OK LED lights steadily.

CAUTION: After the OK LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds before removing

the FPC again, removing a FPC from a different slot, or inserting an FPC in

adifferentslot.

174 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

You can also verify correct FPC and PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc

and show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in “Maintaining FPCs” on

page 133 and “Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables” on page 134.

Figure 88: Installing an FPC

1193

Ejector

levers

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 175

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 89: Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC

1239

Replacing a PCG

During normal operation, both PCGs generate a 125-MHz clock signal, but only

one is designated as the master. The modules and ASICs in the Packet Forwarding

Enginethatusetheclocksignaltogatepacketprocessinguseonlythesignalfrom

the master PCG. For information about determining which PCG is the master, see

“Maintaining the PCGs” on page 135.

PCGs are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page

4. Removal or failure of the backup PCG does not affect router function. If the

master PCG fails or is removed from the chassis, however, the Packet Forwarding

Engine resets so that the components start using the signal from the other PCG

(which becomes the master). Packet forwarding halts while there is no clock signal,

because the Packet Forwarding Engine does not accept incoming packets.

To replace a PCG, perform the following procedures:

Removing a PCG on page 176

Installing a PCG on page 178

Removing a PCG

To remove a PCG, follow this procedure (see Figure 90):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

176 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

3. Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each

corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis. For complete

instructions, see “Removing the Rear Component Cover” on page 86.

4. Press and hold the offline button on the PCG faceplate until the amber LED

labeled FAIL lights, which takes about 3 seconds.

(Keep in mind that if you are removing the master PCG, forwarding halts while

the Packet Forwarding Engine resets so that the components start using

the clock signal from the other PCG, which becomes the master. For more

information, see “Replacing a PCG” on page 176.)

5. Loosen the thumbscrew at the lower right corner of the PCG faceplate, using

a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

6. Grasp the thumbscrew and slide the PCG about halfway out of the chassis.

CAUTION: Be careful to slide the PCG straight out of the chassis to avoid bending

any of the pins on the underside of the board.

7. Place one hand under the PCG to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

Figure 90: Removing a PCG

1929

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

MCS 1

PCG 1

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 177

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Installing a PCG

To install a PCG, follow this procedure (see Figure 91):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Place one hand under the PCG to support it and grasp the thumbscrew on

the faceplate with the other hand.

3. AligntherearofthePCGwiththeguidesinsidethechassisandslideit

in completely.

4. Tighten the thumbscrew on the faceplate to seat the PCG firmly in the chassis.

5. Verify that the green LED labeled OK lights steadily, which takes about

3seconds.

You can also verify correct PCG functioning by issuing the

show chassis environment pcg command, as described in “Maintaining the PCGs”

on page 135.

6. Reinstall the rear component cover and tighten the thumbscrew at each corner

to secure it to the chassis. For complete instructions, see “Reinstalling the Rear

Component Cover” on page 109.

CAUTION: To maintain proper airflow and provide electromagnetic shielding, do

not operate the router without the rear component cover in place.

178 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 91: Installing a PCG

1930

PCG 0

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

RE 0

RE 1

MCS 1

PCG 1

Replacing a PIC

PICs are housed in the FPCs installed in the front of the router, as shown in Figure 1.

PICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units

(FRUs) on page 4. Removing a PIC does not affect router function, except that the

PIC no longer receives or transmits data.

To replace a PIC, perform the following procedures:

Removing a PIC on page 179

Installing a PIC on page 181

Removing a PIC

To remove a PIC, follow this procedure (see Figure 92):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive

the PIC. If the PIC connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety

cap for each transceiver and cable.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. If the PIC has multiple cable connector ports, label the cable connected to each

port, to make it easier to reconnect the cables correctly.

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 179

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

4. Use one of the following methods to take the PIC offline:

Press and hold the PIC offline button until its failure indicator LED lights,

which usually takes about 5 seconds. The failure LED is usually red; for

more information, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.ForthePICs

that install on an FPC1, the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the

FPC card carrier. For the PICs that install on an FPC2, the offline button is

onthePICfaceplate. SeeFigure6.

Issue the following CLI command:

user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot

fpc-slot

pic-slot

offline

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

5. Disconnect the cables from the PIC. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable,

immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber

safety cap.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

6. Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from

dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not

supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the

way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners

on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

7. Unscrew the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the PIC faceplate

simultaneouslyandataboutthesamerate(unscrewingthetwoscrews

180 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged in the

FPC slot, making it difficult to turn the screws).

8. Slide the PIC out of the FPC card carrier and place it in the electrostatic bag or

on the antistatic mat.

9. If you are not reinstalling a PIC into the emptied PIC slot within a short time,

install a blank PIC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the FPC

card cage.

Figure 92: Removing a PIC

1913

Installing a PIC

To install a PIC, follow this procedure (see Figure 93 and Figure 94):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 181

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

2. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that there is a rubber safety cap over

each transceiver on the faceplate. Install a cap if necessary.

3. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the

PIC slot in the FPC and then slide the PIC in until it lodges firmly in the FPC.

CAUTION: Slide the PIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on

the bottom of the PIC.

4. Tighten the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the PIC faceplate

simultaneously and at about the same rate (tightening the two screws

alternately or at very different rates can cause the PIC to become lodged

in the FPC slot, making it difficult to turn the screws). Verify that the PIC

is seated properly.

5. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each

transceiver and the end of each cable.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

6. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIC.

7. Arrange each cable in the cable management system to prevent the cable

from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not

supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the

way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners

on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow

fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

182 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

8. Use one of the following methods to bring the PIC online:

Press and hold the PIC offline button until the status LED on the PIC

faceplate indicates normal functioning, which usually takes about

5 seconds. The LED is usually green; for more information, see the M160

Internet Router PIC Guide. For the PICs that install on an FPC1, the offline

button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier. For the PICs that

installonanFPC2,theofflinebuttonisonthePICfaceplate.SeeFigure6.

Issue the following CLI command:

user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot

fpc-slot

pic-slot

online

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the PIC is online. You

can also verify correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status

command described in “Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables” on page 134.

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 183

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 93: Installing a PIC

1912

Figure 94: Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC

1239

184 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Replace PIC Cables

Removing and installing PIC cables does not affect router function, except that a

PIC does not receive or transmit data while its cable is disconnected. To replace a

PIC cable, perform the following procedures:

Removing a PIC Cable on page 185

Installing a PIC Cable on page 186

Removing a PIC Cable

To remove a PIC cable, follow this procedure:

1. If the PIC connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety cap for

each cable and transceiver.

2. If removing all cables connected to the PIC, use one of the following methods

to take the PIC offline:

Press and hold the PIC offline button until its failure indicator LED lights,

which usually takes about 5 seconds. The failure LED is usually red; for

more information, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.ForthePICs

that install on an FPC1, the offline button for each PIC is next to it on the

FPC card carrier. For the PICs that install on an FPC2, the offline button is

onthePICfaceplate. SeeFigure6.

Issue the following CLI command:

user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot

fpc-slot

pic-slot

offline

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

3. Unplug the cable from the cable connector port. If the PIC uses fiber-optic

cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a

rubber safety cap.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 185

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

4. Remove the cable from the cable management system and detach it from

the destination port.

Installing a PIC Cable

To install a PIC cable, follow this procedure (see Figure 95):

1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIC. For cable

specifications, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

2. If the PIC cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug, remove

the plug.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIC faceplate.

4. Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from

dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not

supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the

way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners

on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

186 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow

fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

5. Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port.

6. Repeat the previous steps for any additional cables.

7. If the PIC is offline (its failure indicator LED is lit), use one of the following

methods to bring the PIC online:

Press and hold the PIC offline button until the status LED on the PIC

faceplate indicates normal functioning, which usually takes about

5 seconds. The LED is usually green; for more information, see the M160

Internet Router PIC Guide. For the PICs that install on an FPC1, the offline

button for each PIC is next to it on the FPC card carrier. For the PICs that

installonanFPC2,theofflinebuttonisonthePICfaceplate.SeeFigure6.

Issue the following CLI command:

user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot

fpc-slot

pic-slot

online

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the PIC is online. You

can also verify correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status

command described in “Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables” on page 134.

Figure 95: Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC

1239

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 187

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Replacing an SFM

Up to four SFMs can be installed in the router, processing a total of 160 Mpps.

The SFMs are hot-pluggable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on

page 4. Removing or inserting an SFM causes a brief interruption in forwarding

performance (about 500 ms) as the Packet Forwarding Engine reconfigures the

distribution of packets across the remaining SFMs.

To replace an SFM, perform the following procedures:

Removing an SFM on page 188

Installing an SFM on page 189

Removing an SFM

To remove an SFM, follow this procedure (see Figure 96):

1. Remove the rear component cover by loosening the thumbscrew at each

corner of the cover and pulling it straight off the chassis. For complete

instructions, see “Removing the Rear Component Cover” on page 86.

2. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

3. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

4. Press and hold the offline button on the SFM faceplate until the amber LED

labeled FAIL lights, in about 5 seconds.

5. Loosen the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab (shown in Figure 8), using

a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

6. Pull the end of each ejector handle outward until it is nearly perpendicular to

the SFM faceplate.

7. Grasp the ejector handles and pull firmly to slide the SFM about halfway

outofthechassis.

8. Place one hand under the SFM to support it, slide it completely out of the

chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.

CAUTION: When an SFM is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles.

They cannot support its weight.

Do not stack SFMs on top of or under other components. Place each one individually

in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

188 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 96: Removing an SFM

1931

Locking tab

Ejector handle

Installing an SFM

To install an SFM, follow this procedure (see Figure 97):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that the ends of the ejector handles are pulled outward to a position

nearly perpendicular to the faceplate of the SFM.

3. Place one hand under the SFM to support it and grasp one of the ejector

handles at the front with the other hand.

4. Align the rear of the SFM with the guides inside the chassis and slide it

in completely.

5. Press the ejector handle at each end of the SFM inward.

6. Tighten the thumbscrew on each ejector locking tab (shown in Figure 8) to

seat the SFM firmly in the chassis.

7. Press the offline button on the SFM faceplate and hold it down until the green

LED labeled OK lights steadily, in about 5 seconds.

You can also verify correct SFM functioning by issuing the show chassis sfm

commands described in “Maintaining SFMs” on page 136.

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 189

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 97: Installing an SFM

SFM 0

SFM 1

MCS 0

1932

Ejector handle

Locking tab

Replace an SFP

Small form factor pluggables (SFPs) are optical transceivers that can be removed

from a PIC (for more information, see “Physical Interface Cards (PICs)” on page 13).

Figure 98: Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP)

1855

Locking pin

Connector

SFPs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. Removing an SFP does not interrupt PIC

functioning, but the removed SFP no longer receives or transmits data. To replace

an SFP, perform the following procedures:

Removing an SFP on page 190

Installing an SFP on page 191

Removing an SFP

To remove an SFP, follow this procedure (see Figure 98):

1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive

the SFP. Have ready a rubber safety cap for the SFP transceiver and the cable.

190 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. Label the cable connected to the SFP so that you can later reconnect it

to the correct SFP.

4. Disconnect the cable from the SFP. Immediately cover the transceiver and the

end of the cable with a rubber safety cap.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

5. Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent it from

dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not

supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the

way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners

on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

6. Pull the ejector handle away from the SFP faceplate to unseat the SFP from

the PIC. Pull the SFP out of the PIC and place it on the antistatic mat or in

the electrostatic bag.

Installing an SFP

To install a replacement SFP, follow this procedure (see Figure 98):

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components 191

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Verify that a rubber safety cap covers the SFP transceiver, installing one if

necessary.

3. Orient the SFP over the port in the PIC such that the connector end will enter

the slot first and the SFP connector faces the appropriate direction:

If the PIC has ten SFP ports, the ports are arranged in two columns. The

SFP connector faces to the right for ports in the left column, and to the

left for ports in the right column.

If the PIC has one or two SFP ports, the SFP connector faces to the left on

platforms in which FPCs install vertically in the chassis, and faces upward

on platforms in which FPCs install horizontally in the chassis.

4. Slide the SFP into the slot. If there is resistance, remove the SFP and try

flipping it so that the connector faces the other direction.

5. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable,

and insert the cable into the transceiver.

WARNING: Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or into the

transceivers on the interface faceplate. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the

interfaces that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light

that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting

or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental

exposure to laser light.

6. Arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent the cable

from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not

supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the

way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners

on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow

fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

192 Replacing Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Replacing Hardware Components

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc

smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems

that are difficult to diagnose.

7. Verify that the status LEDs on the PIC faceplate indicate that the SFP is

functioning correctly (there is an LED for each SFP port). For more information

about the PIC LEDs, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide. You can also verify

PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described in

“Maintaining PICs and PIC Cables” on page 134.

Replacing Power System Components

For instructions on replacing power system components, see the following sections:

Replacing the Circuit Breaker Box on page 193

Replacing a Power Supply on page 197

Disconnecting and Connecting Power on page 200

Replacing a Fuse on page 204

Replacing the Circuit Breaker Box

The circuit breaker box is field-replaceable, but you must power off the router

before removing or replacing it.

To replace the circuit breaker box, perform the following procedures:

Removing the Circuit Breaker Box on page 193

Installing the Circuit Breaker Box on page 195

Removing the Circuit Breaker Box

The circuit breaker box is located on the rear of the chassis above the right

power supply, as shown in Figure 2. It weighs about 6 lb (2.7 kg).

CAUTION: Do not remove the grounding lug from the grounding points on the

chassisduringthisprocedure.

To remove the circuit breaker box, follow this procedure (see Figure 99):

Replacing Power System Components 193

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

1. On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing

Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut

down the router software. (If two Routing Engines are installed, also issue the

command on the backup Routing Engine.)

user@host> request system halt

NOTE: Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating

system has halted.

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

2. For each power supply, press the power switch on the circuit breaker box to

the OFF (O) position.

NOTE: If you are power cycling the power supply rather than shutting it off for a

time, wait at least 60 seconds after turning it off before turning it back on. If you

needtopoweritoffagain,waitforatleast60secondsafterpoweringiton.

3. Shut off the power flowing from both external power sources, so that the

voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V. Ensure that there is no

chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure.

4. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

5. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws securing the

protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box. Remove

the cover.

6. Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, loosen the outer nut securing the cable

lug to each terminal stud. Remove the outer nuts and washers, leaving the

innernutandwasheroneachstud.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

7. Slidethecablelugoffofeachterminalstud.Leavetheinnerwasherandnut

on each stud.

194 Replacing Power System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

8. Remove the rear lower impeller assembly by loosening the thumbscrew at

each corner and pulling the impeller assembly straight out of the chassis. For

complete instructions, see “Removing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly”

on page 155.

9. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screw at each corner of

the circuit breaker box. Loosen the thumbscrews at the top and bottom

edge of the box.

10. Pull the circuit breaker box straight out of the chassis.

Figure 99: Removing the Circuit Breaker Box

1262

Installing the Circuit Breaker Box

To install the circuit breaker box, follow this procedure (see Figure 100):

1. Verify that there is no power flowing from either external power source, so that

the voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V. Ensure that there is no

chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure.

2. For each power supply, verify that the power switch on the circuit breaker box

is in the OFF (O) position.

3. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

4. Align the guide pin on the back of the circuit breaker box with the opening in

the chassis, then push the circuit breaker box straight in.

5. Tighten the thumbscrews at the top and bottom edge of the circuit breaker

box. Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screw at each corner of the box.

6. Slide the power cable lugs for both power sources onto the terminal studs

on the circuit breaker box:

Replacing Power System Components 195

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Connect the positive (+) source cable lugs to the return terminals on the

circuit breaker box, which are labeled RTN(+).

Connect the negative (–) source cable lugs to the input terminals on the

circuit breaker box, which are labeled –48V.

7. Slide a washer and then screw a nut onto each terminal stud (if the washers

and nuts were not installed on the studs, they should be in the accessory box).

Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten the nuts.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

8. Replace the protective shield on the circuit breaker box and tighten the screws

that secure it to the box.

9. Replace the rear lower impeller assembly by lining up the rails with the

guides inside the chassis, pushing the impeller straight in, and tightening the

thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover. For complete instructions,

see “Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly” on page 155.

10. Apply voltage from the DC power sources to the power cables so the router

receives power.

11 . Press the switches on the circuit breaker box to the ON (|) position.

12. Confirm that the LEDs on the power supply faceplates indicate correct

operation: the green CB ON LED lights steadily, the blue OUTPUT OK LED blinks

briefly, then lights steadily, and the amber CB OFF LED does not light.

NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning

it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before

turning it off.

If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply,

the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If

the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router

again, first issue the CLI request system halt command. For more information, see

“Disconnecting Power from the Router” on page 200.

After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status

indicators—such as LEDs on the power supply, show chassis commands, and

messages on the craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is

functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.

196 Replacing Power System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 100: Installing the Circuit Breaker Box

1261

Guide pin

Replacing a Power Supply

The router has two load-sharing, redundant power supplies. Each power supply is

hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on

page 4. When one power supply fails or is powered down, the other power supply

automatically assumes the entire electrical load for the router.

To replace a power supply, perform the following procedures:

Removing a Power Supply on page 197

Installing a Power Supply on page 199

Removing a Power Supply

The power supplies are located at the bottom rear of the chassis, as shown in

Figure 2. Each power supply weighs approximately 13 lb (5.9 kg).

CAUTION: Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a short time

while the router is operational. The power supply must remain in the chassis for

proper airflow.

To remove a power supply, follow this procedure (see Figure 101):

Replacing Power System Components 197

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Press the power switch for the power supply (located on the circuit breaker

box) to the OFF (O)position.

NOTE: If you are power cycling the power supply rather than shutting it off for a

time, wait at least 60 seconds after turning it off before turning it back on. If you

needtopoweritoffagain,waitforatleast60secondsafterpoweringiton.

3. Shut off the power flowing to the power supply from the external power source,

so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V. Ensure that there

is no chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure.

4. Loosen the thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate, using

a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.

5. Grasp the handle or handles on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly

to slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis.

6. Place one hand under the power supply to support it, then slide it completely

outofthechassis.

WARNING: Do not touch the power connectors on the rear of the power supply (see

Figure 102). They can contain dangerous voltages.

Figure 101: Removing a Power Supply

g001918

198 Replacing Power System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

Figure 102: Rear of Power Supply Showing Midplane Connectors

Power supply

input connectors

1224

Power supply

output connectors

Installing a Power Supply

To install a power supply, follow this procedure (see Figure 103):

1. Verify that there is no power flowing to the power supply from the external

power source, so that the voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V.

Ensure that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active

during the procedure.

2. Verify that the power switch for the power supply (located on the circuit

breaker box) is in the OFF (O) position.

3. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

4. Place one hand under the power supply and grasp a handle on the faceplate

with the other hand. Slide the power supply into the chassis until it contacts

the midplane.

5. Starting with the bottom screws, tighten (but do not overtighten) the

thumbscrew at each corner of the power supply faceplate.

6. Press the switch on the corresponding circuit breaker to the ON (|)position.

Verify that on the power supply faceplate the green LED labeled CB ON lights

steadily, the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK blinks momentarily, then lights

steadily, and the amber LED labeled CB OFF does not light.

NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning

it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before

turning it off.

Replacing Power System Components 199

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

If the router is completely powered down when you power on the power supply,

the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If

the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the router

again, first issue the CLI request system halt command. For more information, see

“Disconnecting Power from the Router” on page 200.

After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status

indicators—such as LEDs on the power supply, show chassis commands, and

messages on the craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is

functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.

Figure 103: Installing a Power Supply

g001919

Disconnecting and Connecting Power

The power cables from the external power sources connect to terminal studs on the

circuit breaker box located at the lower right rear of the chassis. To disconnect or

connect power to the router, perform the following procedures. Also follow these

procedures when replacing the power cables, grounding cable, or both:

Disconnecting Power from the Router on page 200

Connecting Power to the Router on page 202

Disconnecting Power from the Router

To disconnect power from the router, follow this procedure (see Figure 104):

1. On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing

Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut

down the router software. (If two Routing Engines are installed, also issue the

command on the backup Routing Engine.)

user@host> request system halt

200 Replacing Power System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

NOTE: Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating

system has halted.

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

2. For each power supply, press the power switch on the circuit breaker box to

the OFF (O) position.

NOTE: If you are power cycling the power supply rather than shutting it off for a

time, wait at least 60 seconds after turning it off before turning it back on. If you

needtopoweritoffagain,waitforatleast60secondsafterpoweringiton.

3. Shut off the power flowing from both external power sources, so that the

voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V. Ensure that there is no

chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws securing the

protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box. Remove

the cover.

5. Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, loosen the outer nut securing the cable

lug to each terminal stud. Remove the outer nuts and washers, leaving the

innernutandwasheroneachstud.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

6. Slidethecablelugoffofeachterminalstud.Leavetheinnerwasherandnut

on each stud.

7. If you are decommissioning the router, loosen and remove the screws that

secure the grounding lug to the chassis and remove the grounding lug.

8. If not immediately attaching replacement cables, replace the protective shield

on the circuit breaker box and tighten the screws that secure it to the box.

9. Verify that the removed cables are not touching or blocking access to any

router components.

Replacing Power System Components 201

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 104: Disconnecting Power Cables

g001226

Terminal studs

Cable lug

Flat washer

To ground

Nut

Grounding

points

Connecting Power to the Router

Connect power to the router by attaching a grounding cable to the chassis

grounding points and attaching power cables from external power sources

to the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box. Power and grounding

cables are not supplied with the router. For cable specifications, see “Power,

Connection, and Cable Specifications” on page 67.

NOTE: The router must be connected to at least two separate external power

sources.

CAUTION: There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding

used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding

for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on the circuit

breaker box. You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.

The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.

To connect power to the router, follow this procedure (see Figure 105):

202 Replacing Power System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

1. Verify that there is no power flowing from either external power source, so that

the voltage across the leads of the power cables is 0 V. Ensure that there is no

chance that the cable leads might become active during the procedure.

2. For each power supply, verify that the power switch on the circuit breaker box

is in the OFF (O) position.

3. Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground.

4. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with

the router to the grounding cable.

5. Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the bottom rear of

the chassis. The grounding points are sized for 1/4-20 UNC screws.

6. Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points, first with the washers,

then with the screws.

CAUTION: Do not substitute metric screws such as M6 for the 1/4-20 UNC screws

that screw into the grounding points; screws other than 1/4-20 UNC screws can

strip the threading in the grounding points.

7. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws securing the

protective shield over the terminal studs on the circuit breaker box. Remove

the cover.

8. Install one flat washer and one nut (in that order) on each power terminal stud:

If no washers and nuts are already installed, they should be in the

accessory box.

If two pairs of nuts and washers are installed on the studs, use a 7/16-in.

nut driver or wrench to loosen the outer nut on each stud. Remove the

outer nuts and washers, leaving the inner nut and washer on each stud.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

CAUTION: The inner washer and nut prevent direct contact between the power

cable lug and the circuit breaker box, which can cause a short circuit.

9. Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs:

Replacing Power System Components 203

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Connect the positive (+) source cable lugs to the return terminals,

which are labeled RTN(+).

Connect the negative (–) source cable lugs to the input terminals, which

are labeled –48V.

10. Install another washer and nut (in that order) on each terminal stud to secure

the power cable lug. Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten the nuts.

11 . Verifythatthesourcepowercablingandthegroundingcablingarecorrect,that

they are not touching or blocking access to router components, and that they

do not drape where people could trip on them.

12. Replace the protective shield over the terminal studs and use a Phillips

screwdriver to tighten the screws.

13. Turnonthecurrentfromthepowersourcesothatvoltageflowstotherouter.

Figure 105: Connecting Power and Grounding Cables

g001226

Terminal studs

Cable lug

Flat washer

To ground

Nut

Grounding

points

Replacing a Fuse

To replace a fuse, follow this procedure (see Figure 106):

204 Replacing Power System Components

Replacing Hardware Components

WARNING: You must power off the router before removing or installing a fuse.

1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

2. Remove the rear lower impeller assembly by loosening the thumbscrew at

each corner of the impeller cover and sliding the impeller assembly out of the

chassis. For complete instructions, see “Removing the Rear Lower Impeller

Assembly” on page 155.

3. Determine which fuse has blown. The amber LED under the fuse lights and the

indicator bulb becomes visible through the clear cover on the fuse.

4. Power off the router as described in or “Disconnecting Power from the Router”

on page 200.

5. Grasp the blown fuse by the edges and rock it in its slot until it comes loose and

disconnects. Rock up and down for a vertically oriented fuse (in the groups

labeled J241 through J243 inFigure106)andsidetosideforahorizontally

oriented fuse (in the group labeled J240). If the cover slips off the fuse, snap

the cover back into place and begin again.

NOTE: We recommend you use an insulated fuse removal tool to remove fuses.

6. Remove the appropriate spare fuse from the group of fuses labeled J244 in

Figure 106. (The labels shown in the figure do not appear on the actual

fuses—the clear cover on every fuse reads BUSS GMT-X—but a table on the

midplanebelowthefuseboxdisplaysthesameinformation.) Verifythat

the spare has the same rating and color coding as the fuse it is replacing,

as specified in Table 25. To see the indicator bulb and printed rating, look

atthefusefromtheside.

7. For a vertically oriented fuse, orient the replacement fuse over the slot so

that the text on the fuse cover (BUSS GMT-X) reads from bottom to top. For a

horizontally oriented fuse, orient the replacement fuse over the slot so that the

text on the fuse cover is upside down.

8. Press the new fuse into the slot.

9. Power on the router as described in “Powering On the Router” on page 119.

10. Verify that the amber LED under the replacement fuse is no longer lit.

Replacing Power System Components 205

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

11 . Reinstall the rear lower impeller by sliding it back into the chassis and

tightening the thumbscrew at each corner of the impeller cover. For complete

instructions, see “Installing the Rear Lower Impeller Assembly” on page 155.

12. Order new fuses from an electrical supply house to replace the spares in the

J244 group. The Cooper Bussman product number for each fuse is GMT- X,

where Xis the amperage rating. For example, product number GMT-15 is

a 15-A fuse, required for an FPC.

Figure 106: Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box

J240

J241

ABCD

J244

ABCD

J242

ABCD

J243

ABCD

MCS0 12A

MCS1 12A

SFM0 10A

SFM1 10A

SFM2 10A

FPC4 15A

FPC2 15A

FPC1 15A

FPC0 15A

PCG0

15A

SFM3 10A

SPARE 1A

SPARE 10A

SPARE 12A

SPARE 15A

FPC7 15A

FPC6 15A

FPC5 15A

1238

PCG1

FPC3

Table 25: Fuse Specifications

Indicator Bulb

Color Component Fuse Rating Quantity Locations

Red and blue FPC 15 A 9 J240 A, B, and C

J241 B and D

J242 A

J243 C and D

J244 D (spare)

Yellow and green MCS 12A 3 J242C

J243 A

J244 C (spare)

Red and white SFM 10 A 5 J241 A

J242 B and D

J243 B

J244 B (spare)

Gray PCG 1 A 3 J240 D

J241 C

J244 A (spare)

206 Replacing Power System Components

Chapter 12

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

This chapter describes how to troubleshoot problems with hardware components

installed in the router. If you encounter software problems, or problems with

hardware components not discussed here, contact the Juniper Networks Technical

Assistance Center (JTAC) as described in “Requesting Support” on page xxiii.

Overview of Troubleshooting Resources on page 207

Troubleshooting the Cooling System on page 212

Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 213

Troubleshooting the Power System on page 215

Overview of Troubleshooting Resources

This section provides an overview of the resources you can use while

troubleshooting problems with the router:

Command-Line Interface on page 207

LEDs on page 208

Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 209

BlownFuseIndicatorsonpage211

Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 212

Command-Line Interface

The JUNOS Internet software command-line interface (CLI) is the primary tool for

controlling and troubleshooting router hardware, the JUNOS Internet software,

routing protocols, and network connectivity. CLI commands display information

from routing tables, information specific to routing protocols, and information

about network connectivity derived from the ping and traceroute utilities.

You enter CLI commands on one or more external management devices

connected to the Routing Engine through ports on the Connector Interface

Panel (CIP). The port labeled AUXILIARY attachestheRoutingEnginetoalaptop,

modem, or other auxiliary device, the port labeled CONSOLE attaches to a system

Overview of Troubleshooting Resources 207

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

console, and the port labeled ETHERNET attaches to a management LAN. For more

information, see “Routing Engine Management Ports” on page 33.

For information about using the CLI to display details about alarms

generated by interfaces and hardware components, see “Chassis and

Interface Alarm Messages” on page 209.

For information about using the CLI to troubleshoot the JUNOS Internet software,

see the appropriate JUNOS Internet software configuration guide.

LEDs

The LEDs described in the following sections indicate the basic

status of hardware components.

LEDs on the Craft Interface

The craft interface provides status and troubleshooting information at a glance.

It is located on the front of the chassis above the FPC card cage, as shown in

Figure 1. The LEDs on the craft interface include the following:

Alarm—The circular red alarm LED at the upper left of the craft interface

indicates a critical condition that can result in a system shutdown. The

triangular yellow alarm next to it indicates a less severe condition that requires

monitoring or maintenance. Both alarms can occur simultaneously. When

an alarm LED is lit, the LCD describes the cause of the alarm. For more

information about the alarm LEDs, see “Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp

Test Button” on page 28. For more information about the causes of alarms,

see “Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages” on page 209.

FPC—For each of the FPC slots in the router, there are two LEDs and an

offline button located on the craft interface directly above the slot. The green

LED labeled OK and the red LED labeled FAIL indicate FPC status. For more

information, see “FPC LEDs and Offline Button” on page 31.

Host module—Two sets of LEDs at the upper right corner of the craft interface

indicate the status of the two host modules. Each set includes three LEDs—a

green one labeled MASTER, another green one labeled ONLINE,andaredone

labeled OFFLINE. For more information, see “Host Module LEDs” on page 31.

208 Overview of Troubleshooting Resources

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

LEDs on Hardware Components

LEDs on the faceplates of the following hardware components report their status:

DC power supply—A green LED labeled CB ON, a blue one labeled OUTPUT OK,

and an amber one labeled CB OFF. The original power supply also has an amber

LED labeled NO AIRFLOW. For more information, see “Power Supply” on page 36.

MCS—A blue LED labeled MASTER, a green one labeled OK, and an amber one

labeled FAIL. For more information, see “MCS Components” on page 26.

PCG—A blue LED labeled MASTER, a green one labeled OK, and an amber one

labeled FAIL. For more information, see “PCG Components” on page 19.

PIC—Most PICs have an LED labeled STATUS on the PIC faceplate. Some PICs

have additional LEDs, often one per port. The meaning of the LED states differs

for various PICs. For more information, see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

SFM—A green LED labeled OK and a red one labeled FAIL.Formore

information, see “SFM Components” on page 20.

Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages

When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition, it lights the red or

yellow alarm LED on the craft interface as appropriate, trips the corresponding

alarm relay contact on the CIP, and reports the cause of the alarm in the

craft interface LCD. To view a more detailed description of the alarm

cause, issue the show chassis alarms CLI command:

user@host> show chassis alarms

There are two classes of alarm messages:

Chassis alarms—Indicate a problem with a chassis component such as the

cooling system or power supplies, as described in Table 26.

Interface alarms—Indicate a problem with a specific network interface, as

described in Table 27.

In both Table 26 and Table 27, the text in the column labeled “LCD Message”

appears in the LCD. The text in the column labeled “CLI Message” appears

in the output from the show chassis alarms command.

Table 26: Chassis Alarm Messages

ComponentLCD Message CLI Message

Fan Failure RED ALARM - fan name Failure

Fan Removed YELLOW ALARM - fan name Removed

Fans and

impellers

Fans Missing RED ALARM - Too many fans missing or failing

Overview of Troubleshooting Resources 209

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Component LCD Message CLI Message

Temperature Warm YELLOW ALARM - Temperature Warm

Temperature Hot RED ALARM - Temperature Hot

Temperature

sensors

Sensor Failure RED ALARM - Temperature sensor failure

PEM pem-ID Removed YELLOW ALARM - PEM pem-ID Removed

PEM pem-ID High

Tem p

RED ALARM - PEM pem-ID High Temperature

PEM pem-ID Output Fail RED ALARM - PEM pem-ID Output Failure

Power supplies

PEM pem-ID Input Fail RED ALARM - PEM pem-ID Input Failure

SFM sfm-number

Failure

RED ALARM - SFMsfm-number Failure(displayed

only if no alternate SFM is housed in chassis)

SFMs

SFM sfm-number

Removed

RED ALARM - SFM sfm-number

Removed(displayed only if no alternate

SFM is housed in chassis)

Host host-number

Failure

RED ALARM - Host host-number Failure

Host modules

Host host-number

Removed

RED ALARM - Host host-number Removed

Craft interface Craft Failure YELLOW ALARM - Craft Failure

Table 27: SONET/SDH Interface Alarm Messages

LCD Message CLI Message

interface-name so- x/x/xBERR-SD interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET bit error rate defect

interface-name so- x/x/xBERR-SF interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET bit error rate fault

interface-name so- x/x/xLAIS interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET line AIS

interface-name so- x/x/xLOF interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET loss of frame

interface-name so- x/x/xLOL interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET loss of light

interface-name so- x/x/xLOP interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET loss of pointer

interface-name so- x/x/xLOS interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET loss of signal

interface-name so- x/x/xLRDI interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET line remote defect

indicator

interface-name so- x/x/xPAIS interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET path AIS

interface-name so- x/x/xPLL interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET PLL lock

interface-name so- x/x/xPMIS interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET path mismatch

interface-name so- x/x/xPRDI interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET path remote defect

indicator

interface-name so- x/x/xREI interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET remote error

indicator

210 Overview of Troubleshooting Resources

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

LCD Message CLI Message

interface-name so- x/x/xSEF interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET severely errored

frame

interface-name so- x/x/xUNEQ interface-name so- x/x/x- SONET unequipped

Blown Fuse Indicators

The router uses fuses from the Cooper Bussman brand GMT series for the

FPCs, MCSs, PCGs, and SFMs. They are located in a fuse box on the rear

ofthemidplane. Whenthefuseforacomponentblows,thecomponent

stopsfunctioningeventhoughitisinstalledcorrectlyandthepower

supplies are still providing power to the router.

Figure 107 shows the location in the fuse box of the fuse for each component.

The labels shown in the figure do not appear on the actual fuses (the clear cover

on every fuse reads BUSS GMT-X), but a table on the surface of the midplane

below the fuse box displays the same information.

Figure 107: Fuse Locations in the Fuse Box

J240

J241

ABCD

J244

ABCD

J242

ABCD

J243

ABCD

MCS0 12A

MCS1 12A

SFM0 10A

SFM1 10A

SFM2 10A

FPC4 15A

FPC2 15A

FPC1 15A

FPC0 15A

PCG0

15A

SFM3 10A

SPARE 1A

SPARE 10A

SPARE 12A

SPARE 15A

FPC7 15A

FPC6 15A

FPC5 15A

1238

PCG1

FPC3

When a fuse has blown but the power supplies are still delivering power to router,

the amber LED adjacent to the fuse lights. For vertically oriented fuses (in the

groups labeled J241 through J244 in Figure 107), the LED is located below the fuse;

for horizontally oriented fuses (in the group labeled J240), it is to the left of the fuse.

NOTE: The LEDs are each about 0.1” (2 mm) square. They might be difficult

to see when not lit.

Another indication that a fuse has blown is that the colored indicator bulb

inside it becomes visible through the clear cover on the fuse. For information

about the indicator bulb color for each fuse type, see Table 25.

Overview of Troubleshooting Resources 211

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

A blown fuse can cause a component to fail even though it is correctly

installed and the power supplies are functioning. Check for a blown

fuse in the following circumstances:

The LED that indicates normal operation for the component fails to light.

The appropriate CLI show chassis environment command indicates that the

componentisinstalledbutisnotreceivingpower.

For instructions for replacing a blown fuse, see “Replacing a Fuse” on page 204.

Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center

If you need assistance during troubleshooting, you can contact the Juniper

Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) by e-mail or telephone.

See “Requesting Support” on page xxiii.

Troubleshooting the Cooling System

The router’s cooling system comprises separate front and rear subsystems:

The front subsystem includes the fan tray located behind the cable

management system and the impeller located behind the craft interface. They

cool the FPCs, PICs, and midplane. See Figure 1.

The rear subsystem include upper and lower impellers in the rear of the

chassis. They cool the SFMs, host module, PCGs, and power supplies. See

Figure 2.

The cooling system draws in room air through the air intake vent located at

the front of the chassis below the cable management system. After entering

the chassis, the air stream separates into separate flows for the front and rear

subsystems, and the MCS monitors the temperature of each flow independently.

For a graphic depiction of the airflow, see Figure 20.

For the cooling system to function properly, the clearance around the chassis

must be sufficient for unobstructed airflow. See Clearance Requirements

for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 62.

During normal operation, the impellers and fans in the fan tray function at less than

full speed. The MCS constantly monitors the temperatures detected by sensors on

the midplane and router components, adjusting the speed of the fans and impellers

as necessary. If the router temperature exceeds the acceptable maximum, the MCS

212 Troubleshooting the Cooling System

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

turns off the power supplies. The following conditions automatically cause the fans

and impellers to run at full speed and also trigger the indicated alarm:

A fan or impeller fails (red alarm).

One of the impellers is removed (yellow alarm).

The router temperature exceeds the “temperature warm” threshold (yellow

alarm).

The temperature of the router exceeds the maximum (“temperature hot”)

threshold (red alarm and automatic shutdown of the power supplies).

For more information about impeller-related alarms, see “Chassis and

Interface Alarm Messages” on page 209.

To troubleshoot the fans and impellers, follow these guidelines:

If the red alarm LED on the craft interface lights, check the LCD on the craft

interface for the source of the problem. The display reports the number of

alarm conditions and the source of each alarm, as described in “LCD Alarm

Mode” on page 30. For a list of messages, see “Chassis and Interface Alarm

Messages” on page 209.

Issue the following CLI command for more information about the source of

an alarm condition:

user@host> show chassis alarms

If the blue OUTPUT OK LED on an enhanced power supply (or the amber

NO AIRFLOW LED on an original power supply) is blinking, the airflow passing by

the power supply might be insufficient. Place your hand near the exhaust vents

at the rear of the chassis to determine whether the impellers are expelling air.

If both power supplies have failed, the system temperature might have

exceeded the threshold, causing the system to shut down. See “All LEDs on

Both Supplies Are Off” on page 215.

If the LCD on the craft interface reports failure of only one impeller and the

other impellers are functioning normally, the impeller is probably faulty

and needs to be replaced. For replacement instructions, see “Replacing

Hardware Components” on page 139. For instructions about returning a faulty

component to Juniper Networks, see “Contacting Customer Support and

Returning Hardware” on page 255.

Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components

The following sections describe how to troubleshoot FPCs and PICs:

Troubleshooting FPCs on page 214

Troubleshooting PICs on page 215

Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components 213

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Troubleshooting FPCs

As soon as an FPC is seated in an operating router, the Routing Engine downloads

the FPC software to it. The FPC then runs diagnostics and enables the PICs housed

on it. During this time, the green LED labeled OK above the FPC on the craft interface

blinks. When the FPC is online and functioning normally, the OK LED lights steadily.

To troubleshoot the FPCs, follow these guidelines:

If the red LED labeled FAIL above the FPC on the craft interface lights steadily,

check the LCD on the craft interface for a message about the status of the FPC

and the PICs housed in it.

Make sure the FPC is properly seated in the midplane—use a Phillips

screwdriver to check that the screws at the top and bottom of the card carrier

are tight.

To check the status of an FPC, issue the following CLI command:

user@host> show chassis fpc

Temp CPU Utilization (%) Memory Utilization (%)

Slot State (C) Total Interrupt DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer

0 Online 37 4 0 32 1 39

1 Online 39 4 0 32 1 39

2 Empty

3 Online 34 1 0 32 1 40

4 Empty

5 Online 35 4 0 32 2 40

6 Online 36 4 0 32 1 39

7 Empty

For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example also

specifies a slot number (0), which is optional:

user@host> show chassis fpc detail 0

Slot 0 information:

State Online

Temperature 37 degreesC/98degrees F

Total CPU DRAM 32 MB

Total SRAM 4 MB

Total SDRAM 256 MB

I/O Manager ASIC information Version 2.0, Foundry IBM, Part number 0

Start time: 2003-04-29 16:11:55 PDT

Uptime: 5 days, 21 hours, 32 minutes, 41 seconds

For further description of the output from the commands, see the JUNOS

Internet Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of

Service, Chassis, and Management.

214 Troubleshooting Packet Forwarding Engine Components

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

Troubleshooting PICs

To troubleshoot the PICs, follow these guidelines:

To check the status of each port on a PIC, look at the LED located on the PIC

faceplate. For information about the meaning of LED states on different PICs,

see the M160 Internet Router PIC Guide.

To check the status of a PIC, issue the following CLI command. The PIC slots in

theFPCarenumberedfrom0through 3, top to bottom:

user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online

PIC 0 4x OC-3 SONET, MM

PIC 1 1x CSTM1, SMIR

PIC 3 2x OC-3 ATM, MM

Slot 1 Online

PIC 0 1x OC-12 SONET, MM

PIC 1 1x OC-12 ATM, MM

PIC 2 2x OC-3 ATM, MM

PIC 3 2x OC-3 ATM, MM

For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS

Protocols, Class of Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

Troubleshooting the Power System

The following LED states indicate that a power supply is functioning correctly:

On the enhanced power supply, the green LED labeled CB ONand blue LED

labeled OUTPUT OK are lit and the amber LED labeled CB OFF is not lit.

On the enhanced power supply, the green LED labeled CB ONand blue LED

labeled OUTPUT OK are lit, and the amber LEDs labeled CB OFF and NO AIRFLOW

are not lit.

If any other LED states apply, consult the following sections:

AllLEDsonBothSuppliesAreOffonpage215

All LEDs on One Supply Are Off or LED States Are not Correct on page 216

AllLEDsonBothSuppliesAreOff

If all LEDs are off on both power supply faceplates, either someone has

switched off power to the router or the system temperature has exceeded the

acceptable maximum. In the latter case, the host module shuts down both

power supplies. There is no power to the router, so the alarm LEDs on the

craft interface are not lit and the LCD also goes blank.

Troubleshooting the Power System 215

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Excessive system temperature is almost always caused by excessive environmental

temperature. Correct the environmental temperature before powering on the router.

All LEDs on One Supply Are Off or LED States Are not Correct

If either of the following conditions applies, perform the diagnostic

procedure described following the list of conditions:

The LEDs on one power supply are all off, but the LEDs on the other supply

indicate that it is functioning properly.

The LED states on one or both supplies indicate a problem:

On the enhanced power supply, the green LED labeled CB ON is not lit and

the amber LED labeled CB OFF is lit, or the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK

is blinking or is not lit.

On the original power supply, the green LED labeled CB ON is not lit and

the amber LED labeled CB OFF is lit, or the amber LED labeled NO AIRFLOW

is lit, or the blue LED labeled OUTPUT OK is blinking or is not lit.

Perform the following steps to diagnose and correct the problem:

1. Check the red alarm LED on the craft interface:

If it is lit, read the message on the craft interface LCD. The display

reports the number of alarm conditions and the source of each alarm,

as described in “LCD Alarm Mode” on page 30. For a list of messages,

see “Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages” on page 209. Issue the

following CLI command for more information about the cause of an

alarm condition:

user@host> show chassis alarms

NOTE: The messages in the craft interface LCD and the output from CLI show

commands refer to the power supply on the right as PEM 0 and the power supply

on the left as PEM 1.

A common cause of power supply shutdown is that the temperature of the

power supply or another router component has exceed the maximum

limit.

If the red alarm LED is not lit, check that the power switch is in the ON (|)

position. The switches are on the circuit breaker box.

2. Replace the faulty power supply with a spare. For instructions, see “Replacing

a Power Supply” on page 197. If the LEDs light correctly on the spare, the

original power supply is faulty. Return it to Juniper Networks for replacement,

as described in “Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware”

on page 255.

216 Troubleshooting the Power System

Troubleshooting Hardware Components

3. If the spare power supply also does not work, connect the router to a different

power source. You might also try replacing the power cord or cable. For

instructions, see “Disconnecting and Connecting Power” on page 200 (you do

not need to disconnect and reconnect the grounding cable).

4. If you cannot determine the cause of the problem or need additional assistance,

see “Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center” on page 212.

Troubleshooting the Power System 217

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

218 Troubleshooting the Power System

Part 4

Appendixes

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 221

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 255

Cable Connector Pinouts on page 269

Appendixes 219

220 Appendixes

Appendix A

Safety and Regulatory Compliance

Information

To install and use the router safely, follow proper safety procedures. This chapter

discusses the following safety and regulatory compliance information:

Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 221

Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 222

Agency Approvals on page 253

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 254

Definition of Safety Warning Levels

This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings:

NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or might

otherwise overlook it.

CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or

discomfort to you, or severe damage to the router.

WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily

injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with

electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.

Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een

situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat

werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken

risico’s en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken

te voorkomen.

Definition of Safety Warning Levels 221

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa

ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota

selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien

ehkäisykeinoista.

Attention Ce symbole d’avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans

une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de

travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits

électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour

éviter les accidents.

Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer

Situation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit

an irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen

verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen

bewußt.

Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe

causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura,

occorreconoscereipericolirelativiaicircuitielettriciedesserealcorrentedelle

pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan

føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de

faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig

praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.

Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que

lhe poderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer

equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e

com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.

¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad

física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la

corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención

de accidentes.

Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som

kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du

vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för

att förebygga skador.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings

This section lists safety guidelines and warnings for installing, operating, and

maintaining the router:

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 224

222 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 227

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 239

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 244

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 247

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 223

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings

The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the router from

damage. The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations

in your working environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times.

Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual. Make sure

that only authorized service personnel perform other system services.

Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before, during,

and after installation.

Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.

Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which

could become caught in the chassis.

Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be

hazardous to your eyes.

Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make

the equipment unsafe.

Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.

Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.

Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically

designed for wet environments.

Operate the router only when it is properly grounded.

Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.

Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions

are provided in this manual. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.

Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame.

Such an action could result in electrical shock or fire.

Avoid spilling liquid onto the router chassis or onto any router component.

Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the router.

Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been

disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical

shock.

In addition, observe the following warnings and guidelines:

Qualified Personnel Warning on page 225

Restricted Access Area Warning on page 225

224 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 226

Qualified Personnel Warning

WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the router.

Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd

personeel uitgevoerd worden.

Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa

tämän laitteen.

Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l’appareil doit être réalisé par

du personnel qualifié et compétent.

Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder

auswechseln lassen.

Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad

installare o sostituire questo apparecchio.

Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte

ut dette utstyret.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal

devidamente treinado e qualificado.

¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por

personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.

Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och

kvalificerad personal.

Restricted Access Area Warning

WARNING: The router is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A

restricted access area is an area to which access can be gained only by service

personnel through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of security,

and which is controlled by the authority responsible for the location.

Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte

toegang. Een plaats met beperkte toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door

servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaal instrument,

een slot en sleutel, of een ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welke beheerd wordt door de

overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 225

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on

rajoitettua. Paikka, johon pääsy on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vain

huoltohenkilöstö pääsee jonkin erikoistyökalun, lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin

muun turvalaitteen avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien toimivaltaisten

henkilöiden valvoma.

Attention Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d’accès réservé. Ces dernières

sont des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut accéder en utilisant un

outil spécial, un mécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre moyen de

sécurité. L’accès aux zones de sécurité est sous le contrôle de l’autorité responsable

de l’emplacement.

Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt

vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem nur

Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß und Schlüssel oder anderer

Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der von dem für die Anlage zuständigen

Gremium kontrolliert wird.

Avvertenza Questa unità deve essere installata in un’area ad accesso limitato.

Un’area ad accesso limitato è un’area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza

tramite un’attrezzo speciale, lucchetto, o altri dispositivi di sicurezza, ed è

controllata dall’autorità responsabile della zona.

Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrenset adgang.

Et område med begrenset adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker

et spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en annen sikkerhetsanordning, og det

kontrolleres av den autoriteten som er ansvarlig for området.

Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito.

Umaáreadeacessorestritoéumaáreaàqualapenastemacessoopessoalde

serviço autorizado, que possua uma ferramenta, chave e fechadura especial,

ou qualquer outra forma de segurança. Esta área é controlada pela autoridade

responsável pelo local.

¡Atención! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de acceso

restringido. Área de acceso restringido significa un área a la que solamente tiene

acceso el personal de servicio mediante la utilización de una herramienta especial,

cerradura con llave, o algún otro medio de seguridad, y que está bajo el control

de la autoridad responsable del local.

Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde.

Ett område med begränsat tillträde får endast tillträdas av servicepersonal med ett

speciellt verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller annan säkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras

av den auktoritet som ansvarar för området.

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Many router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity.

Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You can easily

generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam

226 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe

the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)

damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:

Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap, and make sure that it is in

direct contact with your skin.

CAUTION: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap. The

measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms.

When handling any component that is removed from the chassis, make sure

theequipmentendofyourESDstrapisattachedtooneoftheelectrostatic

discharge points on the chassis, which are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.

Avoid contact between the component and your clothing. ESD voltages

emitted from clothing can still damage components.

When removing or installing a component, always place it component-side up

on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an electrostatic bag

(see Figure 108). If you are returning a component, place it in an electrostatic

bag before packing it.

Figure 108: Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag

CAUTION

ELECTROSTATIC

SENSITIVE

DEVICES

DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE

EXCEPT AT A

STATIC-FREE WORKSTATION

1551

Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings

When working on equipment powered by electricity, follow the guidelines described

in the following sections:

General Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 229

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 227

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 229

Copper Conductors Warning on page 230

DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 231

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 232

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 233

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 234

Grounded Equipment Warning on page 235

In Case of Electrical Accident on page 236

Midplane Energy Hazard Warning on page 236

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 236

Power Disconnection Warning on page 237

TN Power Warning on page 238

228 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

General Electrical Safety Guidelines

Install the router in compliance with the following local, national, or

international electrical codes:

United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United

States National Electrical Code.

Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.

Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC)

60364, Part 1 through Part 7.

Evaluated to the TN power system.

Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working

so that if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.

Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in

your workspace.

Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the

circuit before starting to work.

Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors,

ungrounded power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.

Operate the router within marked electrical ratings and product usage

instructions.

For the router and peripheral equipment to function safely and correctly, use

the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment,

and make certain they are in good condition.

Many router components can be removed and replaced without powering down

or disconnecting power to the router, as detailed in Field-Replaceable Units

(FRUs) on page 4. Never install equipment if it appears damaged.

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

The following electrical safety guidelines apply to DC-powered routers:

DC-powered routers are equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the

power requirements of a maximally configured router. To supply sufficient

power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of

supplying at least 65 A @ 48 VDC. The 48 VDC facility DC source should be

equipped with a circuit breaker rated at 90 A minimum. Incorporate an easily

accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. Be sure to connect the

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 229

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

ground wire or conduit to a solid office (earth) ground. A closed loop ring is

recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.

Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC. Use

appropriate gauge wire to handle up to 90 A.

You must connect only to a DC power source for which the output complies

with the safety extra low-voltage (SELV) requirements of UL 1950, CSA C22.2

No. 950-95, EN 60950, and IEC 60950 to a DC-input terminal block.

A DC-powered router that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended

only for installation in a restricted access location. In the United States, a

restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and

110-18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.

NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker.

This breaker should protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth faults

in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA70.

Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain

conditions, connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit

breaker or damage the equipment.

For personal safety, connect the green and yellow wire to safety (earth) ground

at both the router and the supply side of the DC wiring.

The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for DC-powered routers is the nominal

voltage associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to

be associated with float voltages for the charging function.

Because the router is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive

lead to the terminal labeled RTN(+), the negative lead to the terminal labeled

–48V, and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points.

Copper Conductors Warning

WARNING: Use copper conductors only.

Waarschuwing Gebruik alleen koperen geleiders.

Varoitus Käytä vain kuparijohtimia.

Attention Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre.

Warnung Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Kupferleiter.

Avvertenza Usate unicamente dei conduttori di rame.

Advarsel Bruk bare kobberledninger.

230 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Aviso Utilizeapenasfioscondutoresdecobre.

¡Atención! Emplee sólo conductores de cobre.

Varning! Använd endast ledare av koppar.

DC Power Disconnection Warning

WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power

is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit

breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to

the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.

Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u

te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u

ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de

stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker

naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met

plakband in de UIT positie vast.

Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien

toimenpiteiden suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin,

paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä

suojakytkin KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se

pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.

Attention Avant de pratiquer l’une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier

que le circuit en courant continu n’est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser

le disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer le

disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l’aide d’un ruban adhésif, bloquer la

poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.

Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die

Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher

Strom abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die

Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben

Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.

Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare

che il circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l’alimentazione sia

scollegata (OFF), individuare l’interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che

alimenta il circuito CC, mettere l’interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro

adesivo in tale posizione.

Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet

likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere

strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV

og teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 231

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que

desligou a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se

assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que

serve o circuito de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado),

segurando nessa posição a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.

¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la

alimentación del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para

asegurarse de que toda la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor

automático en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar

el interruptor automático a la posición de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la

palanca del interruptor automático en posición de Apagado (OFF).

Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera

att strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all

strömförsörjning är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar

likströmskretsen och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning

An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded

and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors, but is identifiable by

green and yellow stripes, is installed as part of the branch circuit that

supplies the unit. The grounding conductor is a separately derived system

at the supply transformer or motor generator set.

For further information, see “Power, Connection, and Cable

Specifications” on page 67.

WARNING: When installing the router, the ground connection must always be made

first and disconnected last.

Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het

eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.

Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja

maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.

Attention Lors de l’installation de l’appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être

connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.

Warnung DerErdanschlußmußbeiderInstallationderEinheitimmerzuerst

hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.

Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell’unità, eseguire sempre per primo il

collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.

232 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles

sist.

Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a

ser ligada, e a última a ser desligada.

¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la

última.

Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först

och kopplas bort sist.

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning

WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting

power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then -48 V

to -48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is -48 V to -48 V,

+RTN to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire should always

be connected first and disconnected last.

Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN

naar +RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en

–48 V naar – 48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.

Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN

varten +RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V

varten – 48 V, +RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.

Attention Câblez l’approvisionnement d’alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets

appropriés à l’extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l’ordre approprié de

câblage est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis -48 V à -48 V. En débranchant

la puissance, l’ordre approprié de câblage est -48 V à -48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors

rectifié pour rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d’abord et

débranché pour la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié

d’abord et débranché pour la dernière fois.

Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom-Versorgung mit den passenden

Ansätzen am Verdrahtung Ende. Wenn man Energie anschließt, wird die korrekte

Verdrahtung. Reihenfolge gerieben, um, +RTN zu +RTN, dann -48 V bis -48 V zu

reiben. Wenn sie Energie trennt, ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge -48 V bis

-48 V,+RTN zu +RTN, rieb dann, um zu reiben. Beachten Sie, daß der Erdungsdraht

immer zuerst angeschlossen werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte.

Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l’alimentatore CC

usando i connettori adatti all’estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta

sequenzadicablaggioèdamassaamassa,dapositivoapositivo(dalineaadL)e

da negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve

sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 233

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48

V til – 48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til

+RTN, jord til jord.

Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados

en el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del

cableado se muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces -48 V a -48 V. Al

desconectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado es -48 V a -48 V, +RTN

a +RTN, entonces molió para moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe

conectar siempre primero y desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de

tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por último.

¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados na

extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é

moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então -48 V a -48 V. Ao desconectar a potência, a

seqüênciaapropriadadafiaçãoé-48Va-48V,+RTNa+RTN,moeuentão

para moer. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e

desconectado por último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado

primeiramente e desconectado por último.

Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till –

48 V. Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till – 48 V, +RTN till +RTN,

jord till jord.

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning

WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations,

such as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations should

be the appropriate size for the wires and should clamp both the insulation and

conductor.

Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading

te gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het

gesloten-lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog

wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en

dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen.

Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,

esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin

käännetyt kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia

ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.

Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales

homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses

rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et

doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.

234 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene

Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig,

mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten

die angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch

den Leiter festklemmen.

Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a

occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l’alto. I connettori devono avere la

misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l’isolante che il conduttore.

Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente

ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med

oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til

ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.

Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido,

use terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito

fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações

de cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão

prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.

¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables

homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas

de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño

apropiado para los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante

como el conductor.

Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter

användas, t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken

på dessa kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla

både isoleringen och ledaren fastklämda.

Grounded Equipment Warning

WARNING: The router is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the router is

connected to earth ground during normal use.

Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer

tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.

Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite

on yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.

Attention Cetéquipementdoitêtrereliéàlaterre.S’assurerquel’appareilhôteest

reliéàlaterrelorsdel’utilisationnormale.

Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät

während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 235

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi che il

dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo.

Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet

ved normalt bruk.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se

encontra ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.

¡Atención! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo

principal esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.

Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid

normal användning.

In Case of Electrical Accident

If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:

1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause

further injury.

2. Disconnect power from the router.

3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the

condition of the victim, then call for help.

Midplane Energy Hazard Warning

WARNING: High levels of electrical energy are distributed across the router

midplane. Be careful not to contact the midplane connectors, or any component

connected to the midplane, with any metallic object while servicing components

installed in the router.

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning

WARNING: The router has more than one power supply connection. All connections

must be removed completely to remove power from the unit completely.

Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan één stroomtoevoerverbinding; alle

verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid

volledig te verwijderen.

236 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki kytkennät on

irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.

Attention Cette unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements d’alimentation. Pour

supprimer tout courant électrique de l’unité, tous les cordons d’alimentation

doivent être débranchés.

Warnung Diese Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß; um Strom

gänzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein.

Avvertenza Questaunitàhapiùdiunaconnessioneperalimentatoreelettrico;tutte

le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l’elettricità

dall’unità.

Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle tilkoblinger må

kobles helt fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.

Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte de alimentação

de energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de energia, deverão ser

desconectadas todas as conexões existentes.

¡Atención! Esta unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros de alimentación;

para eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben desconectarse completamente

todas las conexiones.

Varning! Denna enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning; alla anslutningar

måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten är fullständigt bruten.

Power Disconnection Warning

WARNING: Before working on the router or near power supplies, unplug the power

cord from an AC router; switch off the power at the circuit breaker on a DC router.

Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt,

dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact

te halen; voor gelijkstroom toestellen dient u de stroom uit te schakelen bij

de stroomverbreker.

Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ja katkaise tasavirtalaitteiden

virta suojakytkimellä, ennen kuin teet mitään asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet

virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.

Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d’une alimentation

électrique, débrancher le cordon d’alimentation des unités en courant alternatif;

couper l’alimentation des unités en courant continu au niveau du disjoncteur.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 237

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten,

ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw. schalten Sie bei

Gleichstromeinheiten den Strom am Unterbrecher ab.

Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il

cavo di alimentazione sulle unità CA; scollegare l’alimentazione all’interruttore

automatico sulle unità CC.

Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av

strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut p vekselstrømsenheter og

strømmen kobles fra ved strømbryteren på likestrømsenheter.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de

fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente

alternada; desligue a corrente no disjuntor nas unidades de corrente contínua.

¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una

fuente de alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de

corriente alterna (CA); cortar la alimentación desde el interruptor automático en los

equipos de corriente continua (CC).

Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter

skall du för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden och för likströmsenheter bryta

strömmen vid överspänningsskyddet.

TN Power Warning

WARNING: The router is designed to work with TN, IT power systems.

Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN, IT

energiesystemen.

Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-, IT-sähkövoimajärjestelmien

yhteydessä.

Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes

d’alimentation TN.

Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-, IT-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.

Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l’uso con sistemi di alimentazione

TN, IT.

Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-, IT-strømsystemer.

Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN, IT.

238 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación

tipo TN, IT.

Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem

av TN-, IT-typ.

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during router installation:

Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 239

Installation Instructions Warning on page 239

Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 240

Ramp Warning on page 244

Chassis Lifting Guidelines

The weight of a fully configured chassis is about 370.5 lb (168 kg). Observe

the following guidelines for lifting and moving the router:

Before moving the router, read the guidelines in “Preparing for Router

Installation” on page 59 to verify that the intended site meets the specified

power, environmental, and clearance requirements.

Do not attempt to lift a fully configured router by yourself. Using a mechanical

lift to maneuver the router into a rack is recommended. If a lift cannot be

used, a minimum of three people must lift the router, and you must remove

components from the chassis before lifting. For lifting and component removal

instructions, see “Initial Installation” on page 57.

Before lifting or moving the router, disconnect all external cables.

As when lifting any heavy object, lift most of the weight with your legs rather

than your back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and

avoid twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure

that your footing is solid.

Installation Instructions Warning

WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to

apowersource.

Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met

de voeding verbindt.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 239

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.

Attention Avantdebrancherlesystèmesurlasourced’alimentation,consulter

les directives d’installation.

Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die

Stromquelle anschließen.

Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema

all’alimentatore.

Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.

Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.

¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la

red de alimentación.

Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess

strömförsörjningsenhet.

Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings

Ensure that the equipment rack into which the router is installed is

evenly and securely supported, to avoid the hazardous condition that

could result from uneven mechanical loading.

WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the router in a

rack, take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The

following directives help maintain your safety:

The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure.

Theroutershouldbemountedatthebottomoftherackifitistheonly

unit in the rack.

When mounting the router in a partially filled rack, load the rack from the

bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.

If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before

mounting or servicing the router in the rack.

Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel

in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale

240 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft.

De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:

De Juniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die

aan een bouwsel is verankerd.

Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel

het enige in het rek is.

Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u

het rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel

onderaan in het rek.

Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de

stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of

het daar een servicebeurt geeft.

Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä, on

noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi, jotta

vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:

Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty

rakennukseen.

Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.

Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen

alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.

Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista

telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siinä.

Attention Pourévitertouteblessurecorporellependantlesopérationsdemontage

ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions

spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont

destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:

Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks router doit être fixé à

la structure du bâtiment.

Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée

dans le bas.

Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier

de bas en haut en plaçant l’élément le plus lourd dans le bas.

Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs

avant de monter ou de réparer l’unité en casier.

Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten

dieser Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 241

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur

Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:

Der Juniper Networks router muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in

der Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.

Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell

angebracht werden.

Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das

Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten

im Gestell anzubringen ist.

Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die

Stabilisatoren zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen

oder sie warten.

Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di

questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire

che il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la

sicurezza personale:

Il Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve

essere fissato alla struttura dell’edificio.

Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell’unica

unità da montare nel supporto.

Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno,

caricare il supporto dal basso all’alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato

sul fondo del supporto.

Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi

prima di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell’unità nel supporto.

Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på denne

enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt.

Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:

Juniper Networks router må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til

bygningsstrukturen.

Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste

enheten i kabinettet.

Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet

lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.

Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene

installeres før montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i

kabinettet.

242 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade

numa estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o

sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o

seutrabalhocomsegurança:

O Juniper Networks router deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à

estrutura do edificio.

Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja

esta a única unidade a ser montada.

Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens

mais pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.

Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar

ou reparar a unidade.

¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor,

o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado en

que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según

lassiguientesinstrucciones:

El Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura

del edificio.

Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad

en el mismo.

Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado,

comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el

equipo más pesado en la parte inferior.

Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de

montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.

Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför underhållsarbete

på denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda försiktighetsåtgärder

för att försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer ges för att

trygga din säkerhet:

Juniper Networks router måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i

byggnadens struktur.

Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras

längst ned på ställningen.

Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas

nedifrån och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.

Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast

innan enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 243

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Ramp Warning

WARNING: When installing the router, do not use a ramp inclined at more than

10 degrees.

Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.

Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.

Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l’inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.

Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.

Avvertenza Nonusareunarampaconpendenzasuperiorea10gradi.

Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.

Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.

¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados

Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Single-mode Physical Interface Cards (PICs) are equipped with laser transmitters,

which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug

Administration, and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825–1 +A11

+A2 requirements.

Observe the following guidelines and warnings:

General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 245

Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 245

Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 245

Laser Beam Warning on page 246

Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning on page 247

244 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

General Laser Safety Guidelines

When working around PICs, observe the following safety guidelines

to prevent eye injury:

Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown

sources.

Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.

Avoid direct exposure to the beam.

WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation.

The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing

the eye directly on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently

damage the eye.

Class 1 Laser Product Warning

WARNING: Class 1 laser product.

Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.

Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.

Attention Produit laser de classe I.

Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.

Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.

Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.

Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.

¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.

Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.

Class 1 LED Product Warning

WARNING: Class 1 LED product.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 245

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.

Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.

Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.

Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.

Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.

Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.

Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.

¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.

Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.

Laser Beam Warning

WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical

instruments.

Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische

instrumenten.

Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen avulla.

Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l’observer directement à l’aide

d’instruments optiques.

Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen

Geräten prüfen.

Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per

osservarlo direttamente.

Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.

Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com

instrumentos ópticos.

¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos

ópticos.

Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom

optiska instrument.

246 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning

WARNING: Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the

port when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare

into open apertures.

Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort

kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling en

hetkijkeninopenopeningenvermedenteworden.

Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun

kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin

aukkoihin.

Attention Des radiations invisibles à l’il nu pouvant traverser l’ouverture du port

lorsqu’aucun câble en fibre optique n’y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne

pas regarder fixement l’intérieur de ces ouvertures.

Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren, wenn

kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen

auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!

Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono

essere emesse attraverso l’apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e

non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.

Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne,

fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en

fiberkabel.

Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício da

via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá

evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se

encontrarem a descoberto.

¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible

cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las

aperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.

Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten fiberkabel

och du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in i

oskyddade öppningar.

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings

As you maintain the router, observe the following guidelines and warnings:

Battery Handling Warning on page 248

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 247

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Jewelry Removal Warning on page 249

Lightning Activity Warning on page 250

Operating Temperature Warning on page 251

Product Disposal Warning on page 252

Battery Handling Warning

WARNING: Replacing the battery incorrectly might result in an explosion.

Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by

the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen

wordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat

door de fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig

fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.

Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä

vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan

suosittelema. Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.

Attention Danger d’explosion si la pile n’est pas remplacée correctement. Ne la

remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par le

fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Ersetzen

Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen

Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des

Herstellers.

Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata correttamente.

Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal produttore.

Eliminarelebatterieusatesecondoleistruzionidelproduttore.

Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte. Skift

kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser

brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.

Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente.

Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado

pelo fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.

¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera

incorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el

equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según

las instrucciones del fabricante.

248 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet med

samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ

tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.

Jewelry Removal Warning

WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove

jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when

connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal

object to the terminals.

Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is

verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen. Metalen

voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden,

en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan

de aansluitklemmen lassen.

Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa,

ota pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien). Metalliesineet

kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne voivat

aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.

Attention Avant d’accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques,

ôter tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu’ils sont branchés

à l’alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut

provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l’objet métallique aux bornes.

Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind, jeglichen

Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen. Metallgegenstände

erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden, und

können schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen

angeschweißt werden.

Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di

alimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed

orologi). Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di

alimentazione e massa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può

saldarsi ai terminali.

Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du skal

arbeide på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet

til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader

eller smelte fast til polene.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente,

retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os objectos

metálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação à

terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 249

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de alimentación,

quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de metal se

calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede ocasionar

quemaduras graves o que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.

Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur) innan du

arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas upp

när de kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador;

metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.

Lightning Activity Warning

WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during

periods of lightning activity.

Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet aan het

systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.

Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota kaapeleita

ukkosilmalla.

Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les câbles

pendant un orage.

Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an bzw.

trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.

Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un

temporale con fulmini.

Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet når

det tordner eller lyner.

Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos de

mau tempo (trovoada).

¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el

transcurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.

Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta eller

koppla loss kablar.

250 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Operating Temperature Warning

WARNING: To prevent the router from overheating, do not operate it in an area that

exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104οF(40

οC). To

prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) of clearance around the

ventilation openings.

Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper Networks router

dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de

maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40οC wordt overschreden. Om

te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling

rond de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.

Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä ei saa

käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun ympäristölämpötilan

40οC. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on jätettävä ainakin

15,2 cm tilaa.

Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks

router, ne l’utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est supérieure à

40οC. Pour permettre un flot d’air constant, dégagez un espace d’au moins 15,2 cm

autour des ouvertures de ventilations.

Warnung Um einen Router der router vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf dieser

nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur

das empfohlene Maximum von 40οC überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu

verhindern, achten Sie darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die

Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei bleibt.

Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router, non adoperateli in un

locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40οC. Per evitare che

la circolazione dell’aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di

fronte alle aperture delle ventole.

Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks router Disse

skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen

overstiger 40οC(104

οF). Sørg for at klaringen rundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2

cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.

Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks router,

não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima

recomendadade40

οC.Paraevitararestriçãoàcirculaçãodear,deixepelomenos

um espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.

¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks router

se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura

ambiente máxima recomendada de 40οC. Para impedir la restricción de la

entrada de aire, deje un espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas

para ventilación.

Safety Guidelines and Warnings 251

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks router överhettas genom

att inte använda den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade

omgivningstemperaturen på 40οC överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen

inskränks genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring

ventilationsöppningarna.

Product Disposal Warning

WARNING: Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national

laws and regulations.

Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften

te worden afgedankt.

Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia

valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.

Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée

conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.

Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften

entsprechend entsorgt werden.

Avvertenza L’eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita

osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia

Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til nasjonale

lover og forskrifter.

Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo com os

regulamentos e a legislação nacional.

¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas las leyes y

regulaciones nacionales

Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets alla

lagar och föreskrifter.

252 Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Agency Approvals

The router complies with the following standards:

Safety

CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950-00/UL 1950 Third Edition, Safety of

Information Technology Equipment

EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment Classification,

Requirements and User’s Guide

EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

EMC

AS/NZS 3548 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)

EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)

FCC Part 15 Class A (USA)

VCCI Class A (Japan)

Immunity

EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics

EN 61000-4-2 ESD

EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity

EN 61000-4-4 EFT

EN 61000-4-5 Surge

EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity

EN 1000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags

ETSI

ETS-300386-2 Telecommunication Network Equipment. Electromagnetic

Compatibility Requirements

NEBS

GR-63-Core: NEBS, Physical Protection

GR-1089-Core: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network

Telecommunications Equipment

SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)

Agency Approvals 253

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

European Community

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio

interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Japan

The preceding translates as:

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product

may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required

to take adequate measures. VCCI-A

United States

The router has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A

digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed

to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,

uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used

in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be

required to correct the interference at his own expense.

254 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

Appendix B

Contacting Customer Support and

Returning Hardware

This chapter describes how to return the router or individual components to Juniper

Networksforrepairorreplacement:

Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 255

Contacting Customer Support on page 262

Return Procedure on page 263

Tools and Parts Required on page 264

Packing the Routing Node for Shipment on page 265

Packing Components for Shipment on page 267

Locating Component Serial Numbers

Before contacting Juniper Networks, Inc. to request a Return Materials Authorization

(RMA), you must find the serial number on the router or component. To list all of

the router components and their serial numbers, enter the following command-line

interface (CLI) command:

user@host> show chassis hardware

Hardware inventory:

Item Version Part number Serial number Description

Chassis 20082 M160

Midplane REV 05 710-001245 AW3196

FPM CMB REV 03 710-001642 AE6482

FPM Display REV 03 710-001647 AW2008

CIP REV 04 710-002649 HE0493

PEM 0 Rev 03 740-001243 LK16669 Power Entry Module

PCG 0 REV 07 710-001568 HE0486

PCG 1 REV 07 710-001568 HF1163

Routing Engine 0 8b00000792898b01 RE-2.0

Routing Engine 1 6d000007c8150801 RE-2.0

MCS 0 REV 11 710-001226 AV4497

MCS 1 REV 11 710-001226 HD2643

SFM 0 SPP REV 07 710-001228 AG6106

SFM 0 SPR REV 04 710-002189 AG6176 Internet Processor II

SFM 1 SPP REV 07 710-001228 HC5574

Locating Component Serial Numbers 255

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

SFM 1 SPR REV 04 710-002189 HC5964 Internet Processor II

SFM 2 SPP REV 07 710-001228 HE0083

SFM 2 SPR REV 04 710-002189 HD6410 Internet Processor II

SFM 3 SPP REV 07 710-001228 HC5376

SFM 3 SPR REV 04 710-002189 AV8604 Internet Processor II

FPC 0 REV 10 710-001255 HB2143 FPC Type 1

CPU REV 05 710-001217 HE1067

PIC 0 REV 02 750-003064 HF1353 4x T1, RJ48

PIC 1 REV 04 750-001894 HA9492 1x G/E, 1000 BASE-SX

PIC 2 REV 04 750-001895 HE0917 1x OC-12 SONET, MM

PIC 3 REV 04 750-001895 HE0562 1x OC-12 SONET, MM

FPC 4 REV 10 710-001882 HA9606 FPC Type OC192

CPU REV 05 710-001217 AV8340

PIC 0 REV 06 750-003184 HA9606 1x OC-192 SM SR-2

FPC 5 REV 10 710-001255 AH0357 FPC Type 1

CPU REV 01 710-004600 BD2316

PIC 0 REV 02 750-003104 AD9192 4x T3 ATM

PIC 1 REV 05 750-005656 BE1888 2x EIA-530

PIC 2 REV 04 750-003105 AS6972 4x E3 ATM

PIC 3 REV 04 750-001895 HD8100 1x OC-12 SONET, MM

FPC 6 REV 04 710-003950 BC0951 E-FPC Type 2

CPU REV 01 710-004600 AE9024

PIC 0 REV 05 750-001900 AD5625 1x OC-48 SONET, SMSR

Most components also have a small rectangular serial number ID label (see

Figure 109) attached to the component body.

Figure 109: Serial Number ID Label

1600

The following sections describe the label location on each type of component:

CIP Serial Number ID Label on page 257

Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label on page 257

DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label on page 258

FPC Serial Number ID Label on page 259

MCS Serial Number ID Label on page 259

PCG Serial Number ID Label on page 260

PIC Serial Number ID Label on page 260

Routing Engine Serial Number ID Label on page 261

SFM Serial Number ID Label on page 262

256 Locating Component Serial Numbers

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

CIP Serial Number ID Label

The serial number ID label on the CIP is located at the top of the

left side, as shown in Figure 110.

Figure 110: CIP Serial Number ID Label

1621

Serial number ID label

AA1234

Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label

The serial number on the craft interface is located on the back of the panel,

behind the alarm LEDs, as shown in Figure 111.

Locating Component Serial Numbers 257

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 111: Craft Interface Serial Number ID Label

1620

Serial number ID label

AA1234

DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label

The serial number ID label on a DC power supply is located on the

faceplate, as shown in Figure 112.

Figure 112: DC Power Supply Serial Number ID Label

CB ON

CB OFF

OUTPUT OK

PEM

SELF TEST

1619

SP0402 2A

S/N : KM28411

REV: C

REV: 03

121499

P/N : 740-001243

Serial number ID label

258 Locating Component Serial Numbers

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

FPC Serial Number ID Label

The serial number ID label on an FPC is located on the right side,

asshowninFigure113.

Figure 113: FPC Serial Number ID Label

1614

Serial number ID label

AA1234

MCS Serial Number ID Label

TheserialnumberonanMCSislocatedonthebottomattheleft

side, as shown in Figure 114.

Locating Component Serial Numbers 259

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 114: MCS Serial Number ID Label

1616

Serial number ID label

AA1234

PCG Serial Number ID Label

The serial number on a PCG is located on the top, close to the midplane

connector, as shown in Figure 115.

Figure 115: PCG Serial Number ID Label

1617

Serial number ID label

AA1234

PIC Serial Number ID Label

The serial number ID label for a PIC is located on the right side of

the PIC, as shown in Figure 116.

260 Locating Component Serial Numbers

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

Figure 116: PIC Serial Number ID Label

1615

Serial number

ID label

Routing Engine Serial Number ID Label

The location of the serial number ID label depends on the type of Routing Engine

(see Figure 117 and Figure 118). Some Routing Engines might have more than

one serial number. Contact your Juniper Networks support representative if you

need assistance in determining which serial number to provide.

Figure 117: Routing Engine 333 Serial Number ID Label

1607

Serial number ID label

TeknorSiliconSerialID

BoardS/N:900106217

460000078ba2201

Locating Component Serial Numbers 261

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Figure 118: Routing Engine 600 Serial Number ID Label

1576

Serial number ID label

*1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 2 *

SFM Serial Number ID Label

The serial number ID label on an SFM is located on the left side of

thetoppanel,asshowninFigure119.

Figure 119: SFM Serial Number ID Label

1618

Serial number ID label

AA1234

Contacting Customer Support

After you have located the serial numbers of the components you need to return,

contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) in one of the following

ways. You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week:

On the Web, using the Case Manager link at:

262 Contacting Customer Support

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

http://www.juniper.net/support/

By telephone:

From the US and Canada: 1-888-314-JTAC

From all other locations: 1-408-745-9500

If contacting JTAC by phone, enter your 11-digit case number followed

by the # key if this is an existing case, or press the * key to be routed

to the next available support engineer.

InformationYouMightNeedtoSupplytoJTAC

When requesting support from JTAC by telephone, be prepared to

provide the following information:

Your existing case number, if you have one

Details of the failure or problem

Type of activity being performed on the router when the problem occurred

Configurationdatausingoneormoreoftheshowcommands

Return Procedure

If the problem cannot be resolved by the JTAC technician, an RMA is issued.

This number is used to track the returned material at the factory and to return

repaired or new components to the customer as needed.

NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks, Inc. unless you have

first obtained an RMA number. Juniper Networks, Inc. reserves the right to refuse

shipments that do not have an RMA. Refused shipments will be returned to the

customer via collect freight.

For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support

Web page at http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.

For product problems or technical support issues, contact the Juniper

Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) using the Case Manager link at

http://www.juniper.net/support/, or at 1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States)

or 1-408-745-9500 (from outside the United States).

When you need to return a component, follow this procedure:

1. Determine the part number and serial number of the component. For

instructions, see “Locating Component Serial Numbers” on page 255.

Return Procedure 263

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

2. Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Juniper

Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC). You can send e-mail or telephone

as described above.

3. Provide the following information in your e-mail message or during the

telephone call:

Part number and serial number of component

Your name, organization name, telephone number, and fax number

Description of the failure

4. The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number

for return of the component.

5. Pack the router or component for shipment, as described “Packing the Routing

Node for Shipment” on page 265 or “Packing Components for Shipment”

on page 267.

Tools and Parts Required

To remove components from the router or the router from a rack,

you need the following tools and parts:

2.5 mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver, for detaching alarm relay terminal block

5/32-in. Allen (hexagonal) wrench for loosening the mounting screws that

secure the router to the rack; do not substitute a metric-size wrench

7/16-in. hexagonal-head external drive socket wrench, or nut driver, with a

minimum of 30 lb-in. (3.5 Nm) tightening torque, for loosening nuts from

terminal studs on the circuit breaker box

264 Tools and Parts Required

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit

thenutsexactlycandamagethem.Ifa7/16-in.toolisnotavailable,usepliersor

an adjustable wrench.

Blank panels to cover empty slots

Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats, one for each electronic component

removed

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap

Flat-blade screwdriver, approximately 1/4 in. (6 mm), for removing craft

interface

Mechanical lift, if available

Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2

Rubber safety cap for fiber-optic PICs or PIC cable

Packing the Routing Node for Shipment

To pack the router for shipment, follow this procedure:

1. Retrieve the shipping crate and packing materials in which the router was

originally shipped. If you do not have these materials, contact your Juniper

Networks representative about approved packaging materials.

2. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and

connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. Make sure the router

is attached to a proper earth ground. For more information about ESD, see

“Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 226.

3. On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing

Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut

down the router software. (If two Routing Engines are installed, also issue the

command on the backup Routing Engine.)

user@host> request system halt

NOTE: Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating

system has halted.

For more information about the command, see the JUNOS Protocols, Class of

Service, and System Basics Command Reference.

Packing the Routing Node for Shipment 265

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

4. Shut down power to the router by pressing the power switch for all power

supplies to the off (O) position. The switches are on the circuit breaker box.

5. Disconnect power from the router. For instructions, see “Disconnecting and

Connecting Power” on page 200.

6. Remove the cables that connect to all external devices. For instructions, see

“Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable” on page 146, “Replacing the

Console or Auxiliary Cable” on page 146, “Replace Alarm Relay Wires” on

page 147, and “Replace PIC Cables” on page 185.

7. Remove all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) from the router.

8. Remove the router from the rack:

If you are using a mechanical lift, place the lift platform under the router,

unscrew and remove the mounting screws from the rack, and move

the router to the shipping crate.

If you are not using a mechanical lift and the router weight is fully

supported by a shelf or another router, unscrew and remove the mounting

screws from the rack. Four people can then lift the router and move

it to the shipping crate.

If you are not using a mechanical lift and the router weight is not fully

supported by a shelf, four people should grasp the router while a fifth

person unscrews and removes the mounting screws from the rack. The

four lifters can then move the router to the shipping crate.

9. Place the router in the shipping crate or onto the pallet. If on a pallet, bolt the

router to the pallet.

10. Cover the router with an ESD bag and place the packing foam on top of and

around the router.

11 . Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.

12. Securely tape the box closed or place the crate cover over the router.

13. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

266 Packing the Routing Node for Shipment

Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware

Packing Components for Shipment

To pack and ship individual components, follow these guidelines:

When you return components, make sure they are adequately protected with

packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving

around inside the carton.

Use the original shipping materials if they are available.

Place individual boards in electrostatic bags.

Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

CAUTION: Do not stack any of the router components.

Packing Components for Shipment 267

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

268 Packing Components for Shipment

Appendix C

Cable Connector Pinouts

This chapter describes the pinouts for the following cable connectors:

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port on page 269

DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE

Ports on page 270

RJ-48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs on page 270

X.21 and V.35 Cable Pinouts for EIA-530 PIC on page 273

Fast Ethernet 48-port Cable Pinouts on page 274

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port

The port on the CIP labeled ETHERNET is an autosensing 10/100-Mbps Ethernet

RJ-45 receptacle that accepts an Ethernet cable for connecting the Routing

Engine to a management LAN (or other device that supports out-of-band

management). For more information, see “Routing Engine Management Ports”

on page 33. Table 28 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.

Table 28: RJ-45 Connector Pinout

Pin Signal

1TX+

2TX-

3RX+

4Termination network

5Termination network

6RX-

7Termination network

8Termination network

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port 269

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE Ports

The ports on the CIP labeled AUXILIARY and CONSOLE are DB-9 receptacles that

accept RS-232 (EIA-232) cable. The AUXILIARY port connects the Routing Engine

to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary unit, and the CONSOLE port connects it to

a management console. The ports are configured as data terminal equipment

(DTE). For more information, see “Routing Engine Management Ports” on

page 33. Table 29 describes the DB-9 connector pinouts.

Table 29: DB-9 Connector Pinout

Pin Signal Direction Description

1DCD

<– Carrier Detect

2RxD <– Receive Data

3TxD

–> Transmit Data

4DTR –> Data Terminal Ready

5Ground —Signal Ground

6DSR

<– Data Set Ready

7RTS

–> Request To Send

8CTS

<– Clear To Send

9RING

<– Ring Indicator

RJ-48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs

The E1 and T1 PICs use an RJ-48 cable, which is not supplied with the PIC.

CAUTION: To maintain agency approvals, use only a properly constructed, shielded

cable.

Table 30, Table 31, Table 32, and Table 33 describe the RJ-48 connector pinouts.

Table 30: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Straight) Pinout

RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1

PIC) (Data numbering

form)

RJ-48 Pin

(Data numbering

form) Signal

11RX,Ring,–

22RX,Tip,+

TX, Ring, –

55TX,Tip,+

270 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs

Cable Connector Pinouts

RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1

PIC) (Data numbering

form)

RJ-48 Pin

(Data numbering

form) Signal

Shield/Return/Ground

7No connect No connect

8No connect No connect

9No connect No connect

10 No connect No connect

11 No connect No connect

12 No connect No connect

13 No connect No connect

14 No connect No connect

15 No connect No connect

Table 31: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Crossover) Pinout

RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1

PIC)

(Data numbering form)

RJ-48 Pin

(Data numbering

form) Signal

14RX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–

RX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+

41TX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–

TX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+

Shield/Return/Ground

7No connect No connect

8No connect No connect

9No connect No connect

10 No connect No connect

11 No connect No connect

12 No connect No connect

13 No connect No connect

14 No connect No connect

15 No connect No connect

RJ-48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs 271

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Table 32: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Straight) Pinout

RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1

PIC)

(Data numbering form)

DB-15 Pin

(Data numbering

form) Signal

111

RX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–

RX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+

49TX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–

TX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+

34Shield/Return/Ground

Shield/Return/Ground

7No connect No connect

8No connect No connect

9No connect No connect

10 No connect No connect

11 No connect No connect

12 No connect No connect

13 No connect No connect

14 No connect No connect

15 No connect No connect

Table 33: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout

RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1

PIC)

(Data numbering form)

DB-15 Pin

(Data numbering

form) Signal

RX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–

RX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+

411 TX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–

TX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+

34Shield/Return/Ground

Shield/Return/Ground

7No connect No connect

8No connect No connect

9No connect No connect

10 No connect No connect

11 No connect No connect

12 No connect No connect

13 No connect No connect

272 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts for E1 and T1 PICs

Cable Connector Pinouts

RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1

PIC)

(Data numbering form)

DB-15 Pin

(Data numbering

form) Signal

14 No connect No connect

15 No connect No connect

X.21 and V.35 Cable Pinouts for EIA-530 PIC

The EIA-530 PIC accepts X.21 and V.35 cable connectors.

A V.35 connection requires an DB-25 to V.35 cable and connects to a V.35

data terminal equipment (DTE) 34-pin Winchester type male cable (one per

port). Table 34 describes the V.35 cable pinouts.

An X.21 connection requires an DB-25 to X.21 cable and connects to a X.21

DTE DB-15 male cable. Table 35 describes the X.21 cable pinouts.

Figure 120: EIA-530 PIC

g003044

SYNC 1

DSR 1

DCD 1

SYNC 0

DSR 0

DCD 0

PORT 0

PORT 1

EIA-530

Table 34: DB-25 Connector to V.35 Connector Pinout

DB-25 Pin Signal V.35 Pin Description

2TD

PTransmit Data

14 TD S Transmit Data

3RD R Receive Data

16 RD T Receive Data

4RTS C Ready To Send

5CTS

DClear To Send

6DSREData Set Ready

20 DTR HData Terminal Ready

24 XTC UDTE Transmit Clock

11 X TC WDTE Transmit Clock

15 TC YTransmit Clock

X.21 and V.35 Cable Pinouts for EIA-530 PIC 273

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

DB-25 Pin Signal V.35 Pin Description

12 TC AA Transmit Clock

17 RC VReceive Clock

9RC

XReceive Clock

1FGND

AProtective Ground

7GND

BSignal Ground

8 DCD F Data Carrier Detect

Table 35: DB-25 Connector to DB-15 (X.21) Connector Pinout

DB-25 Pin Signal DB-15 (X.21) Pin Description

1FGND1Protective Ground

7GND8Signal Ground

2T2TransmitData

14T9TransmitData

3R4Receive Data

16 R11 Re c e i ve D a ta

4C3Request To Send

19 C 10 Request To Send

8I5 Data Carrier Detect

10 I12 Data Carrier Detect

17 S 6 Receive Clock

9S13

Receive Clock

Fast Ethernet 48-port Cable Pinouts

The Fast Ethernet 48-port PIC has four VHDCI connector ports on its faceplate (see

Figure 121), each of which accepts one of the four RJ-21 cables supplied with the

PIC (see Figure 122). Each VHDCI connector port supports 12 Ethernet ports.

274 Fast Ethernet 48-port Cable Pinouts

Cable Connector Pinouts

Figure 121: Fast Ethernet 48-port PIC

1476

Figure 122: VHDCI to RJ-21 Cable

1480

Table36describestheRJ-21cablepinouts.

NOTE: RJ-21 pin numbers 25 and 50 do not appear in the table because they

are ground connectors.

Table 36: RJ-21 Pin Assignments

Ethernet Port Numbers RJ-21 Pin Assignment

TX- TX+ RX- RX+

0, 12, 24, 36 2 27 1 26

1, 13, 25, 37 429 3 28

2, 14, 26, 38 6 31 5 30

3, 15, 27, 39 8 33 7 32

4, 16, 28, 40 10 35 9 34

5, 17, 29, 41 12 37 11 36

Fast Ethernet 48-port Cable Pinouts 275

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

Ethernet Port Numbers RJ-21 Pin Assignment

6,18,30,42 14391338

7,19,31,43 16411540

8,20,32,44 18431742

9, 21, 33, 45 20 45 19 44

10, 22, 34, 46 22 47 21 46

11,23,35,47 24492348

276 Fast Ethernet 48-port Cable Pinouts

Part 5

Index

Index 277

278 Index

Index

Symbols

[ ], in configuration statements .........................xxi

{ }, in configuration statements........................xxi

( ), in syntax descriptions ................................xx

< >, in syntax descriptions.............................xx

| (pipe), in syntax descriptions...........................xx

#, comments in configuration statements..............xxi

agency approvals .......................................253

air filter

cleaning instructions ..............................129

description (hardware and function)................40

installation instructions............................129

maintenance....................................... 128

removal instructions............................... 128

routine inspection of ..............................127

tools required ...................................... 139

weight................................................83

airflow

path through chassis.................................40

required clearance around chassis for..............62

alarm

messages, list of ................................... 209

relay contacts

connecting/disconnecting wire ..............147

description......................................34

tools required................................. 139

wire specifications..............................74

alarms

cutoff/lamp test button..............................28

handling by Routing Engine.........................54

LEDs (red and yellow) on craft interface ...........28

mode for LCD........................................30

altitude, acceptable range ................................62

antistatic mat, using.................................... 226

application-specific integrated circuit See ASIC

approvals, agency....................................... 253

architecture

overview .............................................51

Packet Forwarding Engine...........................51

Routing Engine ......................................53

ASIC

as key element of router design .....................3

Distributed Buffer Manager

component on SFM ............................19

role in forwarding ..............................52

I/O Manager

component on FPC.............................16

role in forwarding ..............................52

Internet Processor II

component on SFM ............................19

role in forwarding ..............................52

on FPC ...............................................16

on PIC................................................13

on SFM...............................................19

Packet Director

component on FPC.............................16

role in forwarding ..............................52

ATM ana lyzer, u se of.................................... 134

attenuationinf

iber-optic cable ..........................71

auxiliary port (for Routing Engine management)

cable

connection during initial installation .........114

connector pinouts (DB-9) .................... 270

replacement instructions..................... 146

specifications ...................................74

tools required................................. 139

description...........................................33

BITS input ports on CIP...................................34

braces, in configuration statements.....................xxi

brackets

angle, in syntax descriptions........................xx

square, in configuration statements ...............xxi

cable

auxiliary or console port (for Routing Engine

management)

connecting during initial installation .........114

replacing...................................... 146

tools required................................. 139

Ethernet port (for Routing Engine management)

connecting during initial installation .........114

replacing...................................... 146

tools required................................. 139

Index 279

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

fiber-optic

attenuation......................................71

cleaning instructions for transceivers .......134

dispersion.......................................71

multimode and single-mode...................71

transmission distance, maximum .............71

wavelength ranges..............................71

grounding See power and grounding cables

PIC

connecting during initial installation .........115

connecting during maintenance............. 186

disconnecting.................................185

maintaining................................... 134

tools required................................. 139

power and grounding

connecting during initial installation .........117

connecting during maintenance............. 202

disconnecting for maintenance.............. 200

tools required................................. 139

cable management system

description...........................................41

fiber-optic cable, use with......................... 134

weight................................................83

carton See shipping crate

case number, for JTAC ..................................263

center-mount rack See rack

chassis

airflow path through.................................40

alarm messages See alarm, messages

description............................................7

grounding points......................................7

lifting guidelines ................................... 239

process (software module in Routing Engine)......49

weight................................................83

checklist

FPC removal .........................................94

checklist for site preparation.............................75

chromatic dispersion in fiber-optic cable................71

CIP

alarm relay contacts See alarm relay contacts

BITS input ports......................................34

installation instructions............................143

removal instructions............................... 141

Routing Engine management ports See auxiliary

port, console port, Ethernet port

serial number...................................... 257

circuit breaker box

description (hardware and function)................38

installation instructions............................195

removal instructions............................... 193

tools required ...................................... 139

cleaning instructions

air filter............................................. 129

fiber-optic transceivers............................ 134

clearance, around rack ...................................62

CLI

as troubleshooting tool ............................ 207

command

to display chassis alarm messages .......... 209

to display FPC status ......................... 133

to display MCS status......................... 131

to display PCG status ......................... 135

to display PIC status.......................... 134

to display power supply status............... 137

to display Routing Engine status............. 131

to display serial number ..................... 255

to display/switch master host module.........22

tools provided in

for accessing and controlling software ........50

for monitoring software........................50

clock source, SONET/SDH................................25

command-line interface See CLI

commands

ping................................................. 207

request chassis routing-engine master switch......22

show chassis alarms............................... 209

show chassis environment mcs................... 131

show chassis environment pcg ................... 135

show chassis environment pem .................. 137

show chassis fpc.....................................16

for FPC status................................. 133

show chassis fpc pic-status........................ 134

show chassis hardware............................ 255

show chassis routing-engine ...................... 131

show chassis sfm .................................. 136

traceroute .......................................... 207

comments, in configuration statements................xxi

compatibility, electromagnetic...........................65

compliance

EMC requirements................................. 254

general standards.................................. 253

components

hardware See hardware components

hot-pluggable See field-replaceable units

hot-removable and hot-insertable

See field-replaceable units

redundancy ...........................................4

requiring power-down See field-replaceable units

software See JUNOS Internet software

configuration

files, storage by Routing Engine ....................54

router............................................... 121

Connector Interface Panel See CIP

console port (for Routing Engine management)

cable

connection during initial installation .........114

connector pinouts (DB-9) .................... 270

replacement instructions..................... 146

specifications ...................................74

tools required................................. 139

280 Index

Index

description...........................................33

control packets, handling of..............................19

conventions

notice icons.........................................xix

text and syntax ......................................xx

cooling system............................................40

description (hardware and function)................40

maintenance....................................... 127

redundancy ..........................................39

See also air filter, fan tray, front impeller assembly,

rear lower impeller assembly, rear upper

impeller assembly

craft interface

alarm cutoff/lamp test button.......................28

description (hardware and function)................27

installation instructions............................153

LCD...................................................29

LEDs

alarm (red and yellow) .........................28

FPC..............................................31

host module ....................................31

removal instructions............................... 152

routine inspection of ..............................127

serial number...................................... 257

tools required ...................................... 139

crate See shipping crate

curly braces, in configuration statements ..............xxi

customer support.......................................xxiii

contacting JTAC ....................................xxiii

data flow, through Packet Forwarding Engine...........52

DB-9 cable connector pinouts (auxiliary and console

ports).................................................. 270

dispersion in fiber-optic cable............................71

Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC

component on SFM..................................19

role in forwarding....................................52

documentation set

comments on......................................xxiii

E1 PIC, pinouts for RJ-48 cable ........................ 270

earthquakes

site preparation for ..................................62

tested toleration for seismic.........................62

EIA rack standards........................................60

EIA-530 PIC, pinouts for X.21 cable ................... 273

electricity

safety warnings.................................... 227

site wiring guidelines................................65

electromagnetic

compatibility See EMC

pulse..................................................65

electrostatic

bag, using to store components................... 226

discharge See ESD

EMC (EMI)

compliance with requirements ................... 254

standards........................................... 253

suppression ..........................................65

EMP .......................................................65

environmental specifications.............................62

ESD

points on chassis .....................................7

preventing damage to components by ........... 226

Ethernet port (for Routing Engine management)

cable

connection during initial installation .........114

replacement instructions..................... 146

specifications ...................................74

tools required................................. 139

description...........................................33

ETSI rack standards.......................................60

exception packets, handling of...........................19

fan tray

installation instructions

during initial installation ..................... 102

for maintenance or replacement ............ 149

maintenance....................................... 130

removal instructions

during initial installation .......................93

for maintenance or replacement ............ 148

tools required ...................................... 139

troubleshooting.................................... 212

weight................................................83

Fast Ethernet 48-port PIC, pinouts for RJ-21 cable .... 274

fiber-optic cable See cable, fiber-optic

field-replaceable units (FRUs) .............................4

fire safety specifications..................................63

Flexible PIC Concentrator See FPC

font conventions..........................................xx

forwarding tables .........................................47

FPC

ASICs on .............................................16

blank panels .........................................14

components..........................................16

description (hardware and function)................14

installation instructions

during initial installation ..................... 101

for maintenance or replacement ............ 172

LEDs..................................................31

offline button ........................................31

removal instructions

during initial installation .......................94

for maintenance or replacement ............ 170

serial number...................................... 259

Index 281

M160 Internet Router Hardware Guide

tools required ...................................... 139

troubleshooting.................................... 214

types (FPC1 and FPC2)..............................17

weight................................................83

FPC1 and FPC2 See FPC

FPCs

maintenance....................................... 133

status, checking.................................... 133

front impeller assembly

installation instructions

during initial installation ..................... 100

for maintenance or replacement ............ 154

maintenance....................................... 130

removal instructions

during initial installation .......................96

for maintenance or replacement ............ 151

tools required ...................................... 139

troubleshooting.................................... 212

weight................................................83

front-mount rack See rack

FRUs........................................................4

fuses

description (hardware and function)................39

replacement of blown .............................204

use in troubleshooting..............................211

grounding (electrical) specifications

DC-powered router ..................................67

grounding cables

lugs...................................................67

guidelines See specifications

hardware components

FPC...................................................16

host module..........................................22

MCS ..................................................26

midplane.............................................12

overview ..............................................7

PCG...................................................19

PIC....................................................14

power requirements.................................65

reinstallation of all during initial installation .......99

removal of all during initial installation.............84

returning for repair or replacement ..............255

Routing Engine ......................................24

SFM...................................................20

weight................................................83

higher-order mode loss (HOL)............................71

host module...............................................22

description (hardware and function)................22

LEDs..................................................31

maintenance....................................... 131

mastership, checking and switching................22

Juniper Networks M160 Users Manual Print Preview C

M160 to the manual 2d4719d0-72f0-4a59-8cbc-3d264395acc0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation